1 15-jul-11



SAP BASIS Consider the following example [EMAIL or RAILWAY] For Email - It requires a PC and an Application installed in it.



1. Client requests 2. The request is processed by an interface 3. The request reaches server 4. The server process the request 5. Response back to the user either {Ticket/ Email} This environment is called as a Client/ Server Architecture.


R/2 Client-Server 1. Client provides an interface to communicate with the server. Eg: IE, GUI 2. Client uses DB Client software to communicate with server 3. Each request is processed by communicating with server only I.e. there is no intermediate layer in R/2 4. Servers are heavily loaded/ traffic, long queues there by reducing the performance of the servers. 5. There is no queuing mechanism and only server queues are maintained. 6. Server needs to process the request (Understanding the user language). Interpretation takes time. These are the disadvantages of R/2 Systems.

Client Server Environment: Client requests and server responds. The major disadvantage of Client Server architecture is 1. DB Client is installed on the client 2. Processing takes place at client side 3. No intermediate buffers for the frequently accessed content 4. There is no queue mechanism to handle the requests there by servers are heavily loaded. 5. The server side processing consumes resources to process (Interpret the user requests) The need of middle layer/ tier rose to come out of the steps. The result is the Application layer/ Server Application server is deployed and it provides the following functionality 1. DB Client is installed to free up the clients (i.e. there will be only one DB Client for Application server earlier each client needs DB Client software) 2. There is a queue mechanism to handle the request there by reducing the load on the client and server. 3. User requests are served based on the FIFO using dispatcher. 4. Work process task handlers are used to interpret and process the request.

4 5. Intermediate buffers are available for the frequently accessed content to reduce the load on the Database server. 6. The server side processing is only takes place for new requests there by server resources are optimally used. Need for the Middle Layer: R/3 Architecture

The advantages of deploying Application Layer: It is the Intermediate layer in between the Client and the Server. It is installed with a database client to communicate with the database server i.e. all the clients are freed with DB Clients.

Application server/ layer handle the request and process them based on FIFO (First in and First out). It has its own queue mechanism to process the user request. It also contains the task interpreters to interpret the user request and route it to the server.

5 It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data thereby reducing the load on the server.

R/3 Architecture: SAP uses the industry specific 3-Layer Architecture and named it as R/3 Architecture. It consists of three 3 Layers 1. Presentation Server/ Layer/ Tier 2. Application Server 3. Database Layer

1. Presentation Server: It is a client for all the SAP Solutions. It is also referred as SAPGUI. There are three 3 types of SAP GUI 1. SAP GUI for windows (On Windows OS) 2. SAP GUI for JAVA 3. SAPGUI for HTML (On all OS where JAVA is supported) (for web based)

SAP provides various versions of GUI (4.6c, 620, 640, 700, 710 and 720) 2. Application Server: It is used to handle the user request and process them to the database. It has dispatcher to process and monitor the user request, work process to process and interpret the requests, Buffer areas to store the frequently accessed data. It absorbs the load both from Client and the server. 3. Database server/ layer/ tier: It is the area where the complete data resides. It has its own queue, process, buffers, and request handling mechanism. Most of the databases are on Oracle. SAP is pushing MAXDB (without any license key), Microsoft SQL Server & IBM DB2 with discounted prizes. SAP is focusing SMB (Small Mid-sized Business) and promoting SAP for nearly 1 million/ Rs. 10 Lakhs/ per customer.

6 Supporting Platforms: SAP can be installed on Microsoft windows 2000, win2k3 (2008 is under evaluation). It can be installed on 32bit or 64bit operating systems. 64 bit means a single process can serve the user with 4GB RAM/ Memory whereas in 32 bit it is 1.9GB Memory. 264, 232 / 8 bytes. HP UNIX and ORACLE HP UNIX ORACLE AIX and ORACLE IBM Specific operating system with version 5.3 technical (TL) level 7 (TL7) AIX and DB/2 Proprietary of IBM gives more mileage. Both provided by IBM ISERIES/ AS400 with DB/2 This is also IBM specific which provides more consistency, reliability, mileage than any other operating system and database. Sun OS (SOLARIS with ORACLE) LINUX (SUSE, RHL (RED HAT LINUX) and ORACLE LINUX) Note: Linux with MaxDB is supported by SAP and provides more leverage (Finance) Microsoft windows and SQL Server This is the best combination for interactive usage 11.23 /

7 Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI) Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall.exe and follow the onscreen instructions.  Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop.  Double click and enter the entries of the application server Launch saplogon icon and click on New Item Enter the Description Application Server SID System No 16-jul-09

BASIS 1. It provides runtime to SAP Applications 2. Basis is a layer where all the applications reside 3. Basis provides the infrastructure to manage, monitor, and administer the SAP Applications Eg: Basis provides User Management Business process Monitoring Role based Security Performance Gauge etc.

Three 3 Tier/ Layer/ Server Architecture 1. Presentation Server 2. Application Server 3. Database Server

1. Presentation Server It is an SAP GUI. It is of 3 types SAPGUI for windows, HTML and JAVA. It is used to establish connection with SAP Application Server based on the name of the application server, Instance Number, SID etc.

SCM. We can login with our logon language i. GUI is user friendly to create favorites. CRM. BI and SRM) 2. Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop.exe and follow the onscreen instructions. Double click and enter the entries of the application server Launch saplogon icon and click on New Item Enter the Description Application Server SID System No Click on logon Advantages of Presentation Server: 1. Same GUI is allowed to login with different languages 3. startup transactions .8 Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI) Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall.e. XI. Single GUI to access all the SAP Applications (ERP. specify the language during logon.

0 cannot support the component that are built on 7. User parameters are defined for the frequently keyed in content.Set startup transaction 4.To setup startup transactions From menu Extras .10 but 7. Steps: I.From Tools – Administration SU01 .00. To provide default values for a user while creating a Sales order.. 46D. 5.0 can handle 7. plant. Eg: A user belonging to the sales organization.9 . 45A etc. Execute VA01 (Sales order creation) Select the value for sales organisation by pressing F4 Click on sales organisation field and press F1 and click on technical settings Note the parameter ID . 620. sales area should get all the values by default while creating sales order (VA01) etc. division. Example: GUI 7.To create Favorites Login . GUI is downward compatible to support all the SAP Applications which are below the gui version. 640.From Menu Favorites > Add .

SAP GUI is intelligent to determine the least loaded server when more than one instance is configured. Execute SU01 . Role based menu or with 2.ini These files reside in windows directory i.Edit the user .e. Goto Windows directory Saplogon. Now whenever the user executes the transaction VA01 it will be filled with the default values with 0001 and 01 for Sales organization and Distribution channel respectively there by reducing the user tasks.ini . 8. we can configure one GUI and copy the files to the other systems easily. User can be specified with 1.From Parameters Tab . It provides access across the low speed connections and displays the screens without graphics/ logo which consume more network traffic. 2. It gets the information from the Message server.ini/ sapmsg. It provides command window to navigate to the respective functionality and minimizes dialogue steps.ini/ saproute. 10.Provide PID and VKO Value 0001 Save the data.Copying provides all the parameters . 6. GUI entries are controlled by using saplogon. SAP Easy access Menu to reduce the load on the request processing (Roll Area) 7.10 Repeat the same for Distribution Channel and Division. (Low Speed/ High Speed) 9.

Application Server It is a physical server which is used to handle and process the user request. Database Instance This is the Instance where database is installed. Central Instance This is the Instance where Application Server/ Tier/ Layer are installed. 12. Database Instance 1. Help).11 11. 13.500 users depending upon the type of the users. . Dialogue Instance. 2. 2. 14. Instances is of various types 1. We can install as many instances as possible assuming that each instance can serve up to 200 . Central Instance. colors and visual design etc. Dialogue Instance These are the instances which are used to handle the load on the central instances. There will be only one instance in the entire system. GUI provides default menus (System. The character set can be changed to suite various languages and printers. SAP Provides ergonomically designed to configure GUI font size. 2. Instance number is a 2 digit number that varies between [00 to 97] 98 and 99 are reserved for routing purposes. . 3. In SAP naming convention we define them as an Instance and it is possible to install more than one instance on a single server provided they are differentiated by the instance number. SAP Provides various shortcuts window /n to open window from existing window and /o to open a new window /ex to exit the screen. 3.

str .also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted .log Sapappl0.Run .Structure of the DB Control.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed. Each task is commanded by .cmd file and during the process they writes into .bck Sapappl0.log file Eg: Sasapappl0.tsk.log . Select BNAME from SAPSR3.Specifies the installation success / failure .12 Kernel Set of Executables (OS. 32/64 bit dependent) \usr\sap\SID\sys\exe Start . DB and the OS. Usr\sap\<SID>\sys\exe\uc\NT1386 Installation Logs Sapinst.cmd Sapappl0.xml Keydb.USR02.tsk Sapappl0. .sqlplus "/as sysdba" Select username from dba_users.tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB.log Sapinst_dev. Unicode. DB. (database users) (Sap Users) SAP K E R DB OS Kernel Provides communication between SAP.

sap. create services etc.Can create the userid Note: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to install the software. Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment) Domain Admin. AD Admin . On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the owner to work on the database.. 2. Windows App Server <SID>ADM UNIX App Server <SID>ADM Database ORA<SID> Database <SID>ADM . create groups. assign groups.com/swdc 3. (This problems occurs in a Domain) If the user does not exist it creates now.13 WHAT HAPPENS DURING INSTALLATION? 1. Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it from service. create users. Extracts the software. ORA<SID> provide the runtime environment for Database.

SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) It is used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system. SAPSID-Instance Number 5. from Computer Management -> Local Users and Computers we can view this Users Groups Services Creating directories Executables . SAPOSCOL. if the service is not started SAP will not start.OS Dependent . SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it to ABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System) It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack.Domain Level Local groups . It creates Services SAP<SID>_00.Locally SAP_LocalAdmin SAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin SAP_SOL_LocalAdmin 6. It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users Global groups . SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System. SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.DB Dependent .14 Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL. SAP<SID>_01.

7. 9. DB) .Installation Successful -- .Extract Kernel Executables (OS.. owner from dba_tables group by owner.15 Note: . Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA.Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID Sets the user as nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28 SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i.e.str and data on the exports 10.Master password is set accordingly to the company policy . The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen "2 complete 3 running 4 waiting" 11. Select count(*). --. Creates the Database and runs the scripts 8. 12. DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection. Now command files are created pointing to . Query: Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = 'SAPSR3'.TPL Tablespaces are just like almirah in a house. 29769 ABAP related tables. these users owns the respective databases.

Central instance and Typical Installation 20.service.service. Parameter Summary 29.service.sap. Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\<hostname>\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX .com/instguides) 2.com/notes) 5. 3300.sap. Exports path 25. Kernel Path 26. Provide SID and Inst Directory 22. Provide Master Password 23.2_12 7.ASC 15. Install JRE 1. Search for the known problems from (www. 10 networks) 16. JAVA Components and JCE Policy 21.sap.4. Download the software from (www. 4700 are kept open (DVEBMGS uses these ports) 13. SLD (Local SLD) Provide Object server name: Host name 28. Select 2004s 19. 172. Set the virtual memory to 20 GB on windows 9.sap.exe 18. Solman Key 30. Provide DB SID and DB Host 24. Download the Installation Guide (www. Set the Java environment JAVA_HOME path 8. Execute sapinst. Make an entry of the hostname in Hosts file 11.com/platforms) 3. Oracle Client 27. Ensure the installation ports 21212 and 21213 are kept open 12. Installation Proceeds. Verify the software using LABLE. 3600. Get the Static IP address (192. Set the hostname not more than 13 characters 10. Ensure the ports 3200. Check the compatibility of OS and DB (www. Dump the software into system without any spaces in the directories 14.service. Install the OS related patches/ fix packs etc 6. Ensure the internet connection is available with a valid S-USERID 17.com/swdc) 4.16 SAP Installation Steps 1.

support packages. executables etc between systems in the landscape.. [Dev] ----------> [Qlty] ----------> [Prod] SAPmnt TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIX Solution Manager connects all the three systems (ERP i.0. (It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based on Netweaver it is created automatically) SAPLoc in Windows This SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports. .is used during upgrade .Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .is used to host the Developments PUT SID Hosts Trans SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP. Netweaver & CRM2007) .the complete SAP Application Server.17 These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS PRFCLOG PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS .These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) .e. profiles. ECC6.

UNIX) Sapinst. Kernel (Extraction). Linux.cmd. .tpl. . Directories. RFC's DEFAULT USERS <SID>ADM -. . II. Installation Logs Significance Sapinst_dir (Win.tsk. III. Services. Updated Stats. Groups. CreateDB. sapinst_dev.toc. LoadDB. 01) Mater Password JCE Policy Path for the CDs. Installation Inputs SAPInst SID Instance Number (Default 00. Installation Steps Users. . . SharedMnt.str. log.SAP start ORA<SID> -.18 I.For UNIX SAP SERVICE <SID> (OS Level Access Related to SAP) Sys system Master Database .

A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. DB] Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\willsys\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Java Web SAP R/3 Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS PRFCLOG .Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources. It requires its own address. Multiple Components on a Single DB repository A host is either a client or a server. Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now day's only one Master password for all the userids.19 J2ee_ADMIN SAP* DDIC SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Unicode . It provides access to services and information. and is its own machine. A host has its own address on the network. A client accesses the servers. Interface / Screen Exports/ System Copies Kernel [Dependent] Install Mstr [Dependent] Java Comp [Independent] JRE [Dependent] Exports [Independent of OS.

Oracle Service<SID> which is required for the Database On UNIX ps . App) predefined shared SAP Directory with SharedMnt.Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .Which is mandatory to start SAP 3. SAP<SID>_00 . (SAPMnt). SAPOSCOL .ef | grep ora* On Windows services.is used to host the Developments Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA_DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR Check the services and ensure that they are running 1. Checks the DB Status . Trans .20 PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS . and SAPLoc on windows Run ."\\Willsys\Usr" 9.These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) PUT .is used during upgrade SID Hosts .Used for transporting the Objects Note: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by the instance number Queries: SQL> Select status from V$Instance.Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4..Used to collect the OS Resources 2..the complete SAP Application Server.msc Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files.. Listener .Cmd . Trans Directory ..

. 10..Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 ...JAVA Instance 98-99 for routing Note: Each SID uses different Ports Note: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES..SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM directories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA) Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine .. DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 ..ABAP Instance . <SID> Directory \usr\sap\<SID>.21 SQL> Startup followed by enter key SQL> shutdown immediate Note: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box SAPOSCOL_00 SAPOSCOL_01 . \usr\sap\<SID>\config on a particular <SID> ERP <SID1> EP BI JAVA ABAP ERP<SID2> EP BI JAVA ABAP Note: Now-a-days it’s possible to install different engines as add-ons.. Config. Usagetypes. USERS and GROUPS) are available then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system.. 11..is a ABAP Engine JC00 ..used to specify the usage types that are installed on the system...properties .

99 for routing purposes) . SYS Directory Contains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the system EXE Directory .7 we can see only exe directory 13.0) .SRM Suppliers .PI Dealers Enterprise Portal 12. i386/ ia64 In 4.CRM . Instance provides runtime services.ERP (ECC5. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs 17-jul-09 Instance: Logical entity which is installed on a physical entity .22 Eg: Consider Hero Honda Landscape BI .99 (98.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64. Instance Name Instance No: 00 .which is an Application server.

Task Handler contains 3 Interpreters ABAP. Once the request is sent to dispatcher the dispatcher keeps the request in queue. .23 Structure of INSTANCE Instance contains Dispatcher. Task Handler with ABAP.Until the instance is restarted Work Process Work process handles the user request using Task Handler.Once we logoff everything is rolled off. Dispatcher It is used to handle the user requests that are coming from SAP GUI using DIAG (Dynamic Information Action Gateway) protocol on port 3200 + Instance Number. Public Buffer . and SQL Interpreters. SCREEN. and Work process. 3202 etc) Dispatcher manages all the work process and maintains a queue. DB Client and Roll area. (3201. Queue Mechanism. It also contains buffer areas. SCREEN and SQL. Based on the availability of work process it will assign the process to the user request based on FIFO (First In First Out) User Buffer .

6.from the buffer area. Select statement Modify/ Insert . DBWP (Database work process) process and responds back to the R/3 work process. The SAP Kernel which is O/S and DB Specific helps in the interpretation. client. The work process gets the username. User Context It is a user specific roll area which is used to keep user authorizations. 5. Each instance is installed with DB Client software to communicate with Database in Native Language. (The information is copied into Roll Area which is subsequently available for all the requests made by the user) . Keeps in queue and assign WP based on FIFO 4. The DB process checks the credentials of the user and provides the necessary authorizations to the process.Hits the database Open SQL This is SAP Proprietary language to ensure that the SAP Components are Database independent. . R/3 work process checks for frequently accessed content and keeps the copy in R/3 Buffer areas. User requests 2. Process Flow (LOGON) 1. password. The user request is processed and it handovers (handshake) the task to Database process. The response rolls out into the user context before it is sent to the user. The entire information is copied into the user context which is referred as ROLL OUT.24 ABAP interpreter used to interpret the ABAP code in the user request SCREEN interpreter use to interpret the screen SQL interpreter interprets the SQL statements that are sent by the user. logon language and the task handler interprets and hand over the task to the database process. Dispatcher handles the request 3. screens and earlier accessed content. parameters. (Frequently accessed data).

Message G . It is initiated by Dialogue process. It is also recommended to have an update process for every 5 Dialogue.Dialogue V . User executes a transaction Eg: ME22N . The process are determined by the instance name DVEBMGS<Instance_No> For Dialogue instances the work process will be denoted as D01..2112111 It hosts all the process and their will be only one central instance in the entire system. UPDATE 'V' It is used to update the transactions in the database. Work process requires information that is not available in the work process. There should be atleast 2 Dialogue work process per instance.Enqueue B .Gateway S .Spool DVEBMGS is only available in the Central instance.25 Note: The user context remains until the user is logged out. Background and Spool.e.. 3. Further processing continues Types of Work Processes Even though the processes are unique at OS level SAP differentiated between the work processes based on the nature of work.Back ground M . Dialogue work process initiates Update. There should be atleast 1 Update in the entire system. The user context is displayed in the transaction SU56.. . D01 to DN-1 for Dialogue instances. DIALOGUE 'D' It is only the process which communicates interactively with the users. If the user accesses other than the transactions in SU56 it is missing authorizations and displayed from the Tcode SU53 (Missing Authorizations) Process Flow (TRANSACTION) 1. copy user context into the Task Handler.Update E . It is also referred as ROLL IN 4. The request is handled by dispatcher and hand over to the work process. 1. Central Instance DVEBMGS .Purchase Order (or) VA01 . 2. D02. The work process copies the user related information into the task handler i. D .Sales order 2.

BACKGROUND 'B' The tasks which are expensive or time consuming are scheduled to run in the background mode non-interactively. It ensures consistency for updates. There will be only 1 gateway for each instance. . SPOOL 'S' It is used to print the documents to a printer or output to a fax machine etc. 6. ENQUEUE 'E' It is used to provide locks for the records that are going to be updated. 18-jul-09 DVEBMGS00 Dialogue Update Enqueue . It is used to load balance the requests to identify the least loaded dispatcher. It is also possible to configure more spool process depending on the print/ spool volume.1 per system . It is used to manage all the dispatchers. It is possible to have more than one enqueue provided they are installed or configured on the central instance. There will be only 1 Enqueue configured in the system during the installation. spool and btc (background) . There should be atleast 2 background work process in the system 5.Non-Interactive . It is also used to provide locks to the request that are coming from Dialogue instances. GATEWAY 'G' It is used to provide a means of communication with SAP and NON-SAP systems. MESSAGE 'M' There should be only 1 message server in the entire R/3 system.Initiate update.2 per instance .Initiated by dialogue . 4. There should be atleast 1 Spool process in the entire system.Interactive .26 3.1 per system and can be increased Depending upon the update requests but needs to increase only on the Central instance for optimal performance. 7.Provides consistency for updates .

Download the software from www. fax etc.2 .Oracle .com/platforms Windows 2003 2000 Adv. Install the OS with relevant support packs/ Fix packs etc.DB/2 8 . .com/notes 5. Install JRE 1.sap. Server Or 2008 .com/swdc 4.sap.sap.0. Message . .MaxDB .It provides an interface to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP Systems. Download the installation guide from the Market place www.2.com/instguides 2. It is initialized by Dialogue and BTC. 1 Gateway per instance. Search for the known problems in www.Non-Interactive .27 Background .MS SQL Server . 6.service. Only 1 Per system.service. Time consuming And long running jobs are scheduled to run in the background mode. Check the compatibility of OS and DB www. Gateway Spool INSTALLATION 1.It is only the process that outputs the documents to printers.Used during load balancing.4.service.Oracle 10.MaxDB Linux 3.2 per system . It also procures lock from enqueue server To serve the requests that is coming from dialogue instances.2_12 (Java Run time environment) to run the sap inst screens . Atleast 1 spool per system.Initiated by dialogue.sap.service.

My companies Application component .sap.SR3 -EHP1 . ERP 2005 ERP 2004 ..com/instguides www.28 7.com/swdc .ECC5 PRACTICAL SESSIONS www.com/platforms www. Ensure that internet connection is available with a valid S-Userid.ASC 15. 3600.service. Verify the software using LABEL. 172. 10.sercvice. 4700. Kernels.all one word).EHP2 .. Make an entry in the host file etc/hosts.0 Select the Database From Downloads Tab . Set the JAVA environment variable JAVA_HOME or path Check java -version 8.ERP 6. Dump the software into the system. Ensure that 3200. Ensure that the installation ports 21212.service.sap. Get the private static IP address from the Network team (192.Select the components Exports.ECC6 . Set the virtual memory to 20GB on windows 20GB swap memory on HP Unix machines. Set the host name which should not be more than 13 characters 10. Special characters etc (Eg NWDump or Newfolder . JAVA SR1 . 21213 are not blocked (Need to inform Network Admin or Proxy Admin not to block the ports) 12.sap. If RAM is more than 20GB then 20GB * 3 = 60GB 9. (DVEBMGS utilises these ports) 13.SR2 . 4800 series ports are not blocked. networks) 16. 11. The folders should not contain spaces. underscores are allowed 14. 3300.

812 clients are available.800. Central system Instance (Which contain both Central + Database instance) Goto Installation Master DVD . 811. Central Instance 2. IDES (International Demo Education System) will have more clients 11-12 Predefined clients and in the Non-IDES system only 3 Clients (000.To check whether these ports are open or blocked. LABEL.ASC . There will be only 2 exports for Non . 001. Dialogue Instance From the dump bring up sapinst.contains the content and the DVD number from which we can find whether it is an Export 1 Or Export 2 etc. Database Instance 3. Note: Only exports will change for each application like CRM. SCM.29 Click on download to basket Market place > Help and Support > Search for Notes JRE is must as the SAP Screens are developed on JAVA Platform Virtual Memory: [Extended memory towards HDD] Need to set the virtual memory RAM size * 3 + 500MB/ 1GB [32 Bit] Select the drive where SAP is going to be installed.exe From Netweaver 1.IDES system And 6 Exports for IDES system. SRM etc 20-jul-09 INSTALLATION 1. 066) In IDES additional clients . Set the host name Cmd > drivers > etc\hosts IP Address Hostname T1 Shopper Port scan .

CRM.Select the respective inst (sapinst.30 . SRM.. . JCE Policy JAVA Cryptography which is used to provide the secured encryption & decryption over the web . JAVA Components 4. Exports Exports depend upon the business component which is going to be installed like ERP. kernel.exe and on Linux/ UNIX use .select (0) Typical Installation (to install the system with predefined settings i.Specify the SID and the installation drive.Continue the installation . Kernel DVD 3. around 35 modules) . and SCM etc.. MI) and click on next. . It also depends upon the memory.because the content transmission over the web is not secure. . It is an executable.Specify the Master password .The input lists screen is displayed to review before starting the installation. EP./sapinst. Components lies in ECC6. .exe). XI. password are automatically taken).exe .Specify the JAVA component path. The port numbers. CRM. If it is a custom installation more inputs are required. BI. FINANCE. Inst Master DVD 2. and PURCHASE.Select the components that needs to be installed (ERP.On windows sapinst. . SCM.e. .0 are (SALES.Installation depends upon the export content (IDES version may consume 8-12 Hrs) Production version ma take 4-6 Hrs. installation file paths. exports path and JCE policy Required software 1.

Management of the file system. It is up to the customer to choose the Netweaver components and It is mandatory to choose ABAP components.e. . Note: All the SAP components will be installed on the Netweaver Platform. ABAP is the platform for all the SAP Components. fine tuning the performance. processes securing the sensitive data. USER Management. POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES SAP is a transaction based. database administration irrespective of the SAP component and also managing printers. ABAP is a part of the Netweaver. Menu based consumes more dialogue steps than transaction based that is why SAP BASIS consultants are more familiar with transactions. ABAP provides the runtime environment for all the above components i.31 To display all these over the web then EP (Enterprise portal) is required. Administration.

SCM. PI. It checks the compatibility between OS. NETWEAVER(EP. .Market place www. XI. QAS. SM28/ SICK 2.txt format. -Goto . System Number. Installation number. SRM. 4. . -Specify the system ID(SID). DB. SLICENSE . 3. System Type. Execute transaction SM28/ SICK (Installation consistency check). PRD. If there is any inconsistency it will recommends us to fix before proceeding further. Hostname and the Hardware key. The license key is specific to Customer. System Settings SE03 Depending upon the type of system we need to set the system to modifiable and not modifiable. Alternatively select the system and click on display license script and save it to PC in the . DB support packs and R/3 Kernels. OS.service.It is a transaction that is used to apply the license to get the runtime support for the system even though it is valid for 30 days (4 Weeks i. 28 days).com/licensekey -Click on obtain permanent license key -Select the Installation number based on the component (ERP. JDI). DDIC and Master password (specified during installation) 1.32 Login to the system with SAP*. It is recommended to apply license because they are not considered for support. purpose(DEV.sap. DB and the R/3 kernels. provide the downloaded file path and click on OK to apply the license. MI.e. TEST etc) -Click on continue to display the hardware key input. Execute [Slicense] Tcode Click on > New Licenses Click on > Install license key and it prompts for the path of the license key. Based on the displayed message we may need to upgrade OS patch levels. CRM & Solution Manager).Specify the Hardware key and email-id to generate and send license key to the mail-id specified. BI.Hardware key is unique (use command saplicense -key ) .

It locks SPAM so that no upgrades are allowed without a valid Maintenance certificate. SLICENSE SAP Issues two licenses. 21-jul-09 1. 2. one is the permanent key valid upto [31129999] The other one is Maintenance Certificate which is valid upto 3 Months. Kernel Levels. OS levels and Database patch levels.33 Goto SE03/ SE06 system change options to set to modifiable or not modifiable. This Maintenance certificate is introduced from JAN/ 2009 onwards. SE03 .System Settings . PRD. no object can be modified in these systems.SAP Initial Consistency Check Checks for the Incompatibility between R/3 Patch Levels. This is one of the most important security setting which is liable for auditing. SICK/ SM28 . PRE-PRD are set to notmodifiable i.e. Toggling between the changes are recorded and it is advised to obtain permission from the respective authority to make necessary changes in the Production System PRD Except DEV and SANDBOX remaining all the systems like QAS. The changes are only transported to the not modifiable systems. 3.

2. SE06 . It initializes the Transport Management system. Standard Installation 2. DB copy or DB Migration: It is used when a system is setup as a copy of production or preproduction system. 1. A message will populate to configure TMS in the client 000. . SE06 transaction is used to set the CTS (Change Transport System).34 Db click on Set system change Option 4.Perform Post Installation Action Select either one of the option. Standard Installation : It is used when a fresh system is installed. Database copy or Database Migration 1.

SALE . their roles. Domain controller.A pop up window prompts to configure Domain Controller. . Approving the inclusion of Systems Login to the DC Execute STMS From Menu Overview > Systems The system is waiting to be included Select the system and click on approve from Menu SAP System.35 TMS: Transport Management System. Including the system in the Domain Specify the Domain Controller Target host System Number User: TMSADM (Default User) TMSADM is a communication user created during TMS configuration (Do not delete the user. this is the first system in the Landscape Login to the system/ Client 000 with the user other than SAP*/ DDIC Execute T-Code STMS Eg: {from se06 > perform post installation action} > STMS . backup domain controller.Specify the description Transport Domain Name: Domain_<SID> Save the configuration NOTE: If the Domain already exists then we can execute a TCode [DICO] to delete the existing TMS configuration. lock the user. set to expiry will hault the system transports. In most of the environments [DEV] is treated as DC because. Domain Controller: There will be only one Domain Controller in the system landscape. 1. support packages and applicatoins etc) A message SAP system "waiting to be included in the transport domain" is displayed in the external system. change password. It should be executed in STMS and also the RFC connections. It is used to setup the systems.Defining a logical System Creating Virtual Systems . landscape and their routes.

36 It is a standard practice in the industry to create virtual systems as the real systems could not be available during the initial configuration (DEV server is procured during implementation, QAS will be procured after 3 to 4 months from kickoff date and the PRD is procured before 2 months of GoLive) Virtual Machines/ Systems can be replaced by real systems and the configuration now points to the real system. Goto STMS (Domain Controller) > Menu Overview > Systems > SAP System > Create Virtual System For Eg: System : JOQ Description : Quality System TRANSPORT GROUP It is a naming convention group_<SID> we can configure all the systems to a single transport group i.e. all the developments which are performed in Development system will be automatically available to other systems in the landscape. The group of systems which shares the transport directory in common are said to be in one group but due to sensitivity of PRD it is moved into a separate group. 1.
Shared Data


Defining the Landscape

37 Execute STMS > Click on transport routes From over view menu > click on change > from Menu Configuration > Standard Configuration > Three systems in group Eg: Specify DEV: JOD QAS: JOQ PRD: JOP SAVE Provide Three System Configuration under the Description. 22-jul-09 Practicals CONFIGURING STMS

Perform DICO to delete the STMS configured earlier if necessary and the RFC connection from the external system.


38 From 000/ SAP* RZ10 - Initially we have to import profiles from OS Level to SAP level. From menu SYSTEM > Import Profiles of Active Servers SCC4 - Roles are client Specific Logical system <SID> client Cross clients - all the clients SALE - for assigning the logical system. Click on new entries and provide <SID>Clnt900 Default clients : 000, 001, 066 We can create upto 1000 Clients 000 to 999 For the newly created client say in this case 900 a user will be created SAP* with pass as the password. For the first time we cannot login [SAP* / pass] So being from another client perform RZ10 - change the parameter to Login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 0 instead 1 After creating a client need to perform client copy [SAP_CUST] Always need to copy 000 client because it will have all the customized data.066 is for early watch. Create an new user as SAPUSER copied from SAP*/ DDIC logging in as SAP* user from the newly created client. Login to the new client with our userid and password and lock the DDIC and SAP* ----- TASKS ----SETTING UP A LOGO Execute SMW0 Select (0) Binary data for WebRFC Click on Find button

Click on execute

39 Create new Obj name : ZTEST Desc : IMAGE Browse for the Picture

From settings menu > Click on MIME type Add .jpg format Save. GOTO - SM30 Click on maintain Click on new entries START_IMAGE : ZTEST

Prompts for the Change request - proceed and test the logo SETTING UP TEXT Execute - SE61


Document class : General text From document tab NAME - ZLOGIN_SCREEN_INFO create Type the text - Welcome SAVE. 23-jul-09 Roles granted for me in the SAND BOX for Capgemini


5. RZ10 Used to import the profiles from OS level to DB. The profiles are available in \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile. These profile requires management for fine tuning, configuring buffers etc From 000 > Goto RZ10 > Utilities > Import profiles of Active servers >SAVE 6. SMLT

41 Perform language transports if any. The system is an unicoded system to support the all available languages but we need to import the additional languages as per the requirements. Download the languages in \usr\sap\trans\eps\in Directory

Goto SMLT > and create a language > specify supplementary language i.e. if the script is not available in main language it will display in secondary language. English > Primary German > Secondary Goto I18N (Globalization / Internationalization of Languages) Click on > Current NLS settings Get the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = DE If we specify any new language it needs to be updated in the above parameter using RZ10 Clink on ADD from NLS settings to include additional languages that are going to be imported using SMLT.


42 1. Execute I18N 2. Add language that needs to be imported in I18N 3. SMLT create language 4. Click on > Import package > specify the path \usr\sap\trans\eps\in

5. Download language from Market place 6. Import 7. Set the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = AEDZ

6. SPAM Apply the patches that are relevant for SAP application component

7. SR13

Install SAP Library

For documentation > Market Place > SAP Solutions > SAP ERP >English Note: Need to create a folder in D:\SAPHELP. SR13 > New Entries VARIENT SAPHELP PLATFORM WINNT AREA IWBHelp PATH Copy and Paste from Market place.. Dynamic Help 2.Define standard background (House keeping jobs) .. 1.. It is in compressed format. HTML Help File . 8.ini) paste the path.. Plain Html Help .Define Backup schedule . Plain HTML ..click on date and select backup .e. DB13 .Html documentation installed on Web Server 3. when a user struck at one screen he can use Menu Help > Application help. SM36 . opened by html help viewer.43 SAP Provides screen context help i.HTML docu installed on File server 4. (sapdocdc.type (offline/ online) and save 9.It occupies less space.

SU56 . Dialogue process is the only process that interacts with/ communicates interactively with the user. The maximum number of work process an instance can support is W0 to W99 (100 Work processes). If the system supports more than 100 processes then it is better to configure one more instance on the same server differed by the instance number. Eg: 4GB RAM: 1 GB reserve for OS and DB 3 GB 3000/ 150 = 20 Processes Min and Max upto 40 Processes. Each process requires 75MB to 150MB of memory on any average.. There are cases where more than 100 are configured but it is not recommended.44 Note: Create users in SU01 and assign SAP_ALL to the functional and technical team as the security is not implemented.from Work Directory .SM50/ SM66 . * The work process are configured by the parameter rdisp/wp_no_dia = XX . If a reporting user requires 3GB of memory then there will be a memory bottleneck.DPMON . The requests are processed by using a dialogue process. There should be atleast 2 Dialogue process per instance. 24-jul-09 STRUCTURE OF APPLICATION SERVER Dispatcher Workprocess User Context Task Handler Buffers .ST02 Dispatcher receives the request and processes them according to the queue. The memory should be calculated after reserving memory for OS and the Database. but depends upon how heavy the processing goes.

Transportation (LUW for a local tour) BIND 1 & 2 & 3 4.. 1. Upon task completion reset the value in RZ11 (No system restart is required) WORK PROCESS MULTIPLEXING (Consider Restaurant Activities).45 For an Ideal Instance the sum of the Dialogue processes should more or less equal to non-dialogue process (unless a reporting server. BIND 1 & 2 Tickets to and fro + Accommodation) 3. which needs only dialogue) The dialogue response time should be around 600 to 1000 Milliseconds (1 Second) Each dialogue process is restricted by using a parameter rdisp/max_wprun_time = 600 s (10 Minutes) after which the process will be timed out.10 users and Each SAP transaction consists of multiple (LUW Logical unit of work) Each LUW contains task which should be completed/ rollback as a group. Each LUW is a commit or rollback (no intermediate stage . (No dialogue process remains ideal) Each process can serve 5 . during the month end the parameter can be changed to 1800 10000 from RZ11 for specific period of time. Appointment (Dates are not available Eg: Darshinam) BIND 1 2 3 4 Each of the LUW is performed by a single different work process and is restricted to 600 Seconds and task has to complete within 600 milliseconds .. which makes the system inconsistency) CONSIDER A TRAVEL AGENCY In a travel agency buying the ticket is LUW (Outward/inwards). Each user transaction may be served by one or more processes with out restricting to the user similarly each work process serve multiple users with out restricting the user. In order to run the activities that consume more time then the above we need to run in the background mode or increase the parameter value from RZ11 (Dynamic parameter) i. LUW (Outward/ inward) Booking accommodation (LUW for number of days) 2.e.

000 20.4000 USD In India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum Developers are charged differently 10 Users + 1 Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.000 4% VAT 17% Maintenance /Year 48.3% Service Tax + Customs 22% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA 5 22% Eg: 1 24% Telco Bajaj ARAMCO 2 26% .8000 USD 10.40000 USD .5000 .46 LICENSING Standard License Maintenance License . 000 -----. 68.till 9999(YYYY) .04. 000 2. 00.3 Months Each user license cost .270 -50000 .04.--14.000 ------------------------14. 04. 000 .000 2.

Password never expires (Service Userid) 25-jul-09 Dialogue handles the requests and process only reports with out any assistance. During an update dialogue updates temporary table and update-process updates them later.SOLMAN. Hardware Key (Installed by SAP . expensive then they can be scheduled to run in the BTC mode.Its an executable) Note: All the executables resides in . Hostname 3.get It checks for 1. MI License is user based Once the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button From cmd prompt Soladm> saplicense . SRM. If the reports are long running. . PI. EP. SID 2.47 One License .System Measurement for the users SUSER . time consuming. ECC. BI.D:\USR\SAP\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386 Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapest SAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAP USMM .

Killing the process From Command Prompt > DPMON (Process the list at OS Level) >K > Provide . DW . The spool process Prints from Temse (Temporary Sequential file it can be at file/ DB Table) Dialogue communicates with enqueue while updating a transaction and obtains lock so that no user can update there by assuring data consistency. and DPMON DPMON.Type of Process : (DVEBS) Message and Gateway are not displayed . Dialogue is monitored by using SM50. They are displayed as [DISP+WORK] on windows in the Task Manager.Serial Number : Starts with 0 (DEV_W0) in work directory .Process PID : The identifier at OS level. SM66. It is used to kill the process at OS Level. Dialogue communicates with the gateway while establishing connection with other SAP systems.exe is a dispatcher monitor which can be executed when the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass).dispatcher work process in UNIX 0 to 11 [12] And 1 is for dispatcher 13 Total .PID PROCESS MANAGEMENT SM50/ SM66 Work process list is displayed in SM50/ SM66.48 For print requests Dialogue handles the request and update in Temse.Serial Number > Provide . Dialogue communicates with the message server to obtain locks for a record that is coming from Dialogue instance. Each process has the following . Its not a TCode.

From SM66 .User name : Name of the user .Click on SELECT PROCESS . It displays the processes belongs to all the instances.CPU : The amount of time WP spends utilising CPU resources .e. action on the database. It will be completed only after the task completion/ timeout. Running : The process is executing the task (SM50 running with our Userid should not be considered) On Hold : The user request is on hold by process for waiting certain Resources on the other systems (RFC. insert i.Error : No of times the process is restarted . Running Waiting : The process is waiting "Available" to serve the user request. not restart(NO) . Update.Restart YES/ NO : if the process is terminated and it will restart automatically (Yes).Client : The client number logged in .Action : Select. CPIC) Shutdown : The process is killed/ shutdown but restart mode set to NO Waiting for PRIV Mode: The process goes into Heap mode. Stopped : The process is stopped due to an error. .Table : Name of the table. 26-jul-09 SM66 GLOBAL WORK PROCESS OVERVIEW It displays the processes based on status. .Runtime : The amount of time the process spends on the user request.49 -status : Waiting. Stopper.Report : The name of the program/ report the WP is executing .Semaphore : The block that hold at OS Level (DISK) . SLEEP MODE: The work process goes into sleep mode waiting for resources (RFC problem) .

We can terminate the session or the user completely using End session or logoff user. Process Flow 1. BWP looks into the table and identify the jobs which are in the Ready State. a job is scheduled to run at a specific time or periodically. i. smon. * To delay the BTC processing increase the time as much as possible. BWP runs the job in the Active mode till completion/ Cancelled. The Dialogue work process handles the request and updates the tables 3. A program SAPMSSYS starts in the dialogue mode at frequency that is defined in the parameter rdisp\btctime=60Sec SAPMSSYS . Double click on the WP to display (Extended. From User > Logoff User > Local or End the session BACKGROUND PROCESS SM36 It is used to run the expensive programs. Weekly sales report or expensive to run in the peak hours so they are scheduled to run in the background mode during off peak hours.BTCTRNS1 from SE38 We can also use BTCTRNS2 to resume the background jobs (Execute the program) 5. BWP are defined by using rdisp/wp_no_btc=2 (Min 2 per system) We can increase as many as possible depending upon the resources. pmon.Checks for every 60 sec into the TBTC* table. reports that consumes more time in the background mode. Example : 100000 seconds 27Hrs RZ11 (rdisp/btctime) Refer . 6. dbwr. ** Note: We can pause jobs by setting the value to 0 zero ** BWP jobs are defined in SM36 . Tables TBC* are used to store the BTC Jobs 4. Example: Daily report. User submits the request via dispatcher to a WP.50 The major advantage of this is it displays the memory consumed by work process. ckpt. 2.e. Roll and the Heap Memory) On Oracle execute PS -ef |grep ora* (lgwr. arch) SM04 : is used to display the logged in users along with the sessions.

Class B has medium priority over class C jobs Class C jobs runs with Normal Priority JOB STATUS 1.. B. ABAP Program 2. Variant .Is a predefined program that will be run in the background with user inputs as variants. Eg: BRBACKUP. BRARCHIEVE.Name of the instance that provides BWP to run the job Exec Target . C (High.Willsys_<SID>_00 Click on step JOB STEPS We need to specify the following for the JOB Execution 1.IMMEDIATE or DATE. The jobs in DB13 uses OS Commands. Eg: consider RSPO1041 from SA38 Goto SA38 and define variant for 7 & 15 days Prog: RSPO1041 Variant: willsys SAVE Click on start condition . Completed: The job is completed or finished Execution server .. Scheduled: The job is defined but time to execute is not specified. Active: BWP processing the task 5. ABAP Program . Cancelled: The job is cancelled 6. External Commands: The job can be executed by external commands which are defined in SM49/ SM69. External Program 1. 2.. . Released: The time to execute is specified 3. Low Priority) Class A requires a dedicated BTC of class A which are defined in operation modes. BRCONNECT Use DB13 to schedule the jobs. External Command 3. Medium.Is a predefined value that is populated during the runtime. 2.51 Specify Jobname: Daily report JobClass: C A. These commands are OS commands that will be executed at command level. Ready: The Time to run the job is reached 4. BRRESTORE.

Specify the name of the target host. External Programs: NAME: Name of the program Parameter: Target Host: Name : Specify the name of the program and the parameters. Instance 2. Specify the processes for modes Goto SM63 to define timing for the modes RZ04 > click on Create [Instance Operation Mode] Peak_mode Peak_mode operations Default SAVE Off peak Off peak Mode Create new Instance willsys28 Start profile Save.52 3. Operation Modes (Peak and Off Peak) 3. OPERATION MODES RZ04 SM63 It is the process of switching DIA to BTC and vice versa during the peak hours as we need more dialogue process and during off peak we need more BWP to run the BTC jobs. Job Started: When dependent job started this gets triggered. Specify the start condition Immediate/ Periodic/ Jobstart. 27-jul-09 BACKGROUND JOB MONITORING SM37 . Event: When an event triggered in SAP it also triggers the job as well. Modes. Event (SM62)/ Operation. RZ04 > Define 1.

status ----. The jobs with status READY indicates the jobs are ready to pickup by the scheduler Eg: Consider a CAB . expensive programming or sql statements/ fetching huge amount of data. date & time. Action: 1.might come late No sufficient CABS Long time in ready status indicates 1. Also due to passing the jobs by extending scheduler time/ making BTC to 0 by running the program BTCTRNS1. 2. The jobs with status RELEASED indicate the jobs are released with scheduled time and waiting for their turn/ time. job name.to make use of the resources optimally SM37 is used for BTC monitoring Execute SM37 Specify username. The existing jobs are running for a long time i.53 rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 rdisp/btctime = 10 Operation modes .e.Execute F8 1. May be due to heavy load on the system 4. Schedule the jobs appropriately during off peak hours. 3. Increase BTC work processes based on the available resources by using the parameter rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 2. 3. The configured BTC processes are not sufficient to handle the requests in Ready status. 2. ACTIVE BTC in active status (long time recorded) .

Jobs are waiting for the locks to update the records. annual reports. Jobs are waiting to be processed by the target system (RFC. 1.54 The job is running an expensive activity like client copy. Reasons and Resolutions ACTION. Report to SAP in case of dead locks. 2. 2. Jobs that fetch information from BW systems. Jobs are expensive and running to fetch the content. Wait until the locks are released/ jobs are completed.and click on Job Logs Execute SM37 Highlight the job Click on Job log Sap takes at most care to avoid dead locks. Select the status . Check the bottle neck on the target system (ERP-BI-EP-SRM-SCM-SRM) 3. pay roll run. dunning reports may take hours together or even days to complete successfully. Some jobs are bound to run for hours and based on history leave them to run. CPIC) 3. FINISHED . 4.Db click . Active indicates the following 1.

ORA-272) 9. ORA-1654) 7. Archive struck (ORA-255. or corrupted. file not found as well. ORA-1632) 8. CANCELLED Job status cancelled/ finished but failed in the log. file sharing issues. Page Errors) 10. lack of roles etc. As a part of the post installation we need to schedule house keeping jobs in SM36 Execute SM36 Click on "Standard Background Jobs" . Dependent jobs/ events failure 12. Variants are not properly defined. userid expiry. Update mechanism failed 6. Problem in the program and inputs (Indefinite loops like 1/0) 11. Target systems are not available to process the jobs. 3. Table space over flow (ORA-1653. 2. Standard Background House keeping Jobs 1. file came with different characters. User and password Issues (Authentication/ Authorization) user lock. The memory is not sufficient and errors (No Roll Area. File system problems: BTC reads from the file system to update the database. Dead locks issue (Lock mechanism congested) 5. PXA (Buffer). File not opened. password change. 4. 5.55 The jobs are completed successfully but check the log for further information/ completion. Reasons for cancellation of Job 1. Table space max extent reached (ORA-1631.

RSSNAPDEL 3. RSPO1043 Eg: from SA38 .Delete old update requests/ logs 5.Delete the old ABAP Dumps . 1.Spool Reorganization Click on Execute And Specify the Days .56 Click on "Default Scheduling" And schedule the BTC jobs with default time.. RSCOLL00 . RSMO13002 . 6. .Collects performance info in transaction ST03. RSBTCDEL . RSPO1041 4.Delete the old spool logs and files .Used to delete the background jobs Reporting structure "BTC" "DEL" 2..

date and status 2. 1.57 From GOTO Menu > Variants > SAVE as Variant SM37 . Used to display the jobs based on job. It displays the job logs By highlighting a job and click on Job Log .MONITORING BACKGROUND JOBS. username.

KODAK Runs 14.000 Jobs/day . (Consider the above screen) Active jobs can be moved. fax or email or even updating a database (Eg. how to handle various statuses and alert users accordingly. We can move the jobs from one instance to another instance. We can repeat the scheduling of the job if required 5. Eg.58 3. 28-jul-09 There are Third Party BTC Job Schedulers 1. The tool defines when to trigger. From Menu Job > Move to different server. TIDEL Scheduler 4. SAP Job Scheduler 5. Do not kill the active job unless it is permitted by the owner 4. Background job out put is a report to a spool (Printer). RED WOOD Scheduler 3. MAESTRO Scheduler / IBM These Third party schedulers are not specific to SAP but we can customise these to SAP These job schedulers are intelligent to work based on the status of Predecessors. CONTROL-M Scheduler 2. Client Copy) 6.000 Jobs/ day HP Runs 20.

Communication with NON SAP Systems to fetch the data 6. i. Run long running reports for an End User 2.59 BTC . Monthly and Annual Reports 8. Dunning report for Finance team 7. Picture tubes. Weekly. Runs standard jobs for House Keeping . R/3 BIW Replication 5. SAP also sends soft documents as well. the communication is performed electronically. BTC Jobs performs the following: 1.e. Vendors instead of communicating in hand documents they are advised to communicate in soft documents.Business Case Sony an electronics company communicates with suppliers for the TV Cabinets/ Circuit boards. Client copy for the technical consultants 4. assembling & packing. Runs payroll for the employees 3.

To run Database jobs using external commands DB13 (SM49 provides commands) NOTE: In table TSTC. From SE11 . we can get a list of all existing Tcodes and which programs are called by those transactions.Provide the table name TSTC and execute providing the T-Code to find the Program No bother of "Schedule/ Released" Will not in our scope We need to take care about the Status .60 9.

To store data that needs to be updated VBMOD . Dialogue process updates the temporary tables called as VB* asynchronously VBHDR .. There are three 3 Types of updates V1 .61 Ready for longer time Active for the longer time. Dispatcher handles the request and provides a dialogue process to it. BTC logs are deleted by scheduling RSBTCDEL which deletes the log files from TBTC* based on the time interval in the Variant SA38.Update Error Table . 3.To store update header information VBDATA .Reserved by SAP (Currently no use) Updates are defined by the parameter Rdisp/wp_no_vb=1 Rdisp/wp_no_vb2=2 from RZ11 Technically for every 5 dialogue work process there should be one update of type V1/ V2 Update Flow: 1.The modules through which the data is updated VBERR . DB 2. UPDATE PROCESS It is used to update the database from Temporary tables. 4.Handles High Priority Updates V2 . Dialogue process interprets the request and communicates with enqueue process to provide a lock to update the record consistently. User submits the request for an update (Let us say a Purchase Order) Eg: Bearers won’t go to the Pantry Similarly All dialogue won’t go to the.Handles low priority updates V3 ...

62 And gets a transaction ID from Number Range Buffer (Transaction SNRO and Table NRIV Number Range Interval Table) SNRO NRIV Eg: .

Max Extents reached (ORA-1631. Table Space overflow (ORA-1653. Update inherits the locks and releases them upon updating permanent tables. Dead Lock (Needs to inform SAP for Program correction) Updates which could not be updated will be thrown into ERR Status. 5.63 Dialogue Updates .Update Releases the lock. Update updates the record based on transaction-ID using VBMOD Table (Every update is module based in SAP) 6. Update handles the record and change the status to "RUN" If the update stays long time in status RUN 1. ORA-1632) 5. If the records stays for longer time in INIT status that indicates the updates are busy or there are no sufficient update processes or update mechanism is deactivate from SM14. Archive Struck (ORA-255. Programming problems in LUW 3. 1. Longer Update 2. When the Dialogue updates the temp tables the record is displayed in SM13 which will be processed by update. Update gets initialized and reads from Temp Tables and updates the permanent tables synchronously. ORA-1654) 4. Update deactivated in SM14 2. UPDATE MONITORING SM13 The record that needs to be updated by update process is displayed in SM13 with status INIT. ORA-272) 29-jul-09 BATCH/ BTC/ BACKGROUND .

The update are terminated or cancelled due to the following reasons 1. Table space overflow 2. That is the reason why dialogue updates Temp Table. 1. 9. User submits the request. 7. If any one of the LUW is failed the entire transaction is rolled back. SM13 . 3. Archive struck 4. Update gets initiated to update the VB* content permanently into the database. Gets the transaction ID from NRIV (Number Range Interval Table) 6. Updates the database based on transaction ID. Update Deactivation (SM14) Running updates during deactivation DEACTIVATE -----------> THROWS TO ERROR -------------> GOES TO AUTO At this point of time we need to select the update (put a check mark of the update from SM13) and click on [Repeat Update] Refer modules from SM13 .Repeat Update Used to repeat the ERR updates. Programmatical Error 5. VBDATA. Update releases the lock from the record. UPDATE Statuses. Dialogue handles the request. 8. ERR The record runs in to an Error (Update Error) RUN The update is executing the record into DB AUTO The error records are reprocessed after a system restart/ update activation Automatically.64 Each SAP transaction is considered as Single LUW (Logical unit of work) which in turn contains multiple LUW's needs to be committed to commit the SAP Transaction. VBMOD. INIT The record is waiting to update by an update process. Obtains lock from Enqueue so the data consistency is achieved and the records are only for display. 2. 4. The following are the statuses displayed in SM13 Transaction. Update inherits the locks. Updates the request in Temp tables (VBHDR. Max Extents reached 3. VBERROR) 5.

65 The updates can be repeated with status ERR Rdisp/vbmail = 1 to send email to the users if an update is failed. Report in SA38 RSM13002 To delete the old update requests. 2. Update mechanism can be deactivated by setting the parameter rdisp/vb_stop_active=0 to deactivate the update mechanism in case of DB errors. (Its a background job) V1 and V2 updates needs to be defined in the system. Rdisp/vbreorg =1 to delete the incomplete update request during a system restart. Deletes the executed update requests. V1 handles critical updates and V2 handles the non-critical updates which are defined by the programmers. rdisp/vbdelete=30 to delete the update records older than 30 days irrespective of the status. There will be only one message server through out the System. We can see either V1 or V2 in the standard SAP Program SAPMV45A by executing SE38 MESSAGE SERVER/ PROCESS 1. It is used to manage all the dispatchers and identify the least loaded dispatcher and forward the user request to the dispatcher provided logon load balancing is configured in transaction SMLG . Reorganize the update tables. It can be activated from SM14.

ini if not exists from (x:\windows) Sapmsg. Define a logon group from TCode SMLG 2. 4. For Eg: MARKETING dewall36_R3I_00 We can find the Active servers from SM51 and on db click on the Host name to view all the Processes.ini > open [MESSAGE SERVER] DEV = <hostname> 3200/tcp . 3. Note: The load is calculated based on in ST07 5.66 Logon Groups SMLG SMLG > Create Provide GROUP: INSTANCE: Now from SAP Logon Screen Click on Groups > and Provide SID and Message Server. create a file sapmsg. Add an entry in etc/ services As sampsDEV (Message Server Name) Entry should be made on all GUI systems. Open GUI > Select groups and create entry by choosing group. CONFIGURING SMLG 1. Assign the instance.

Update.Queue . 3. . 2. User communicates using GUI. BTC.Dialogue Message server obtains the lock for dialogue process if the request is coming from the Dialogue instances. Enqueue. It provides locks from a lock table before a record gets updated and ensure that the record is available for display during an update. SMMS: MESSAGE SERVER MONITORING ENQUEUE PROCESS / SERVER SM12 Monitoring Note: Server Naming convention is used because each of the process serving the user requests (Dialogue.ini gets evaluated and checks the port in etc\services to communicate with the message server. Message. Gateway and Spool DVEBMGS) It is also possible to install and configure all the above servers on different instances or hosts. Message server maintains the details of favorite server and routes the request to that dispatcher 4. ENQUEUE: It is used to provide data consistency while updating the system. sapmsg. Dispatcher handles the request .67 Mechanism 1.

MULTIPLE LUWS MM Dept X + Y (LUW1) Z + M (LUW2) Q + R (LUW3) Sales Dept A + B (LUW1) X + Y (LUW2) R + Q (LUW3) Dead Lock Enqueue process the locks and unlock the record during an update. It is also possible to increase Enqueue processes to more than one depending upon the updates but most of the customer environments there will be only 1 One enqueue process. If both are installed on the same machine then it will be more comfortable for message server to communicate with Enqueue process to obtain locks for Dialogue process that are coming from other instances. Enqueue server maintains the lock table on the shared memory of the Central Instance (or on the instance where it is installed) It is recommended to increase the Enqueue processes only on the Central Instance. It is configured by the parameter rdisp/ wp_no_enq = 1 30-jul-09 DEAD LOCK SAP TRANS -----.68 There will be 1 One Enqueue process installed during installation. RFC . Technically the Message and the Enqueue should reside on the same instance (It is not mandatory).

69 DIA .DIA TCODE .ENQ . 1.MSSG . Check whether the update server is still performing the updates. If the lock table is filled (Enque/ Table_size) an overflow occurs in the lock table. If the updating has stopped. We can resolve the problem by restarting the updates. Enque time is too high . then we must enlarge the lock table.LOCK . In principle the lock which are older than one hour should be reported to the escalation manager. Locks are monitored in transaction SM12. If updating has not been interpreted.SM12 (Lock Management) Enqueue table size is defined by the parameter Enqueue/table_size=4MB (Earlier 1 MB to 4 MB) in Netweaver systems this can be increased to 100MB LOCK MONITORING/ ENQUEUE MONITORING Shared Mode Exclusive Mode.MSSG . then the lock table can quickly become over filled with the locks held by update requests. Note: Enque table overflow is recorded in SM21 and ST22 Eg: Execute SU01 from Shawn user/ 800 and edit shramana user Execute SU01 from Shawn user/800 and edit shramana user Following message is displayed SM12 And now execute SM12 which displays the Exclusive Mode lock 2.

2. Dead locks (Usually never occurs. 1.DIA .(TST01. but there is a collision between PP. Update is deactivate (SM14) due to any of the issues in DB. Do not release the lock in SM12 (Even though there is an option) Lock deletion is recorded in SM21. 3.DIA-. so highlight this issue to SAP) In some instances we may need to release the locks but we need to follow certain process. but however BTC is allowed. 31-jul-09 SPOOL PROCESSING User request . 4.(TST01. If the update gets deactivated then the locks are not released. there could be RFC issue or Enque wait time is increasing then consider increasing Enqueue work processes.PRINT User request . We may need to allow some locks for more than one hour or days (Eg. Manufacturing and Material Module. Payroll update processing) consumes lot of time. We need to ensure that dialogue process should not held for longer time.70 As a part of the response time enqueue time should be 1ms . Lock table is overflow and the locks are held in SM12 2. If the Enqueue time increases i. TST03)--SPOOL -.5ms for Central instance and 100Ms in case of the request that is coming form Dialogue instance. Then we can consider the following 1. Check the period of lock (if it is older than 1 hour inform to the escalation manager) 3.SPOOL -----.(Tables TBT*) BTC---. (Only Terminate or End that session) All the transaction activities are recorded in CDHDR Note: Initially 20Kb Mem is given from ztta_roll_first. Users complaint that he could not update a record and message pop up stating that the record is locked by user XYZ.e. TST03) --. Get the written B&W approval from the user and terminate the session of that user using SM04.PRINT .

TEMSE size is 99000 Refer: SU22 . 2. It is recommended because the print request are printed faster than database.Single Process The Advantages of TEMSE.Database tables TST01 and TST03) Note: DIALOGUE BTC . User request to print a purchase order (or) user schedule to print dunning reports (LEGAL Notices. These print request are processed by the respective Dialogue/ BTC and stores the content in TEMSE . (Every day 50-100 Docs) if the size increases the search at file level consumes more time as (No indexes at file system) .To identify the tcode/ Authorization objects SP01 SU24 The Temse can be stored in database or OS level.(s_spo_act) . from Global directory requests can be converted to output request at faster rate than database. Temse remains in the DB/OS unless they are deleted explicitly by SAP standard reports.Multiplexing .71 PROCESS/ FLOW: 1.Temse is a temporary sequential objects that are stored at OS (File system) or Database level which is defined by the parameter rspo/store_location=G or DB (G Means Global Directory \usr\sap\SID\sys\global) (DB Means .. i. This is only recommended when the requests are small in nature.e. LOANS etc) 2. Credits. TEMSE AT OS OR DB (WHICH ONE IS RECOMMENDED?) OS [G] 1.

File system backup will be weekly. fortnight. but shows the performance by using Indexes when the user grows (Temse can handle 90000 Requests) 2.72 3. That is Temse is not secured at file system.e. the name of the author (USER). File system is not backup frequently as Database. Backup is a regular activity on database so the Temse is secured.Spool Process OUT PUT REQUEST FRONT END > Spool process comes at our Desktop Default setting is DB RZ11 : rspo_location : rdisp/ btctime 3. DIALOGUE . Name of the Printer. TST02] .[TST01. The Spool process reads from TST01 and TST03 i. Consumes more time than Temse at OS when there are less no of records. No of copies are procured from TST01 and Printable data from TST03 .Spool Process DIALOGUE . As it is stored in tables. DB [DB] 1.BTC request . Temse is a part of Normal Database (TST01 and TST03) no separate memory is required. monthly whereas database is hourly (Redo Logs) and daily DB Backup.

73 Spool Process formats or converts spool requests to output requests i. Refer: From SE12 TPFYPROPTY Flag for changes Obj_name = parameter Rdisp/time Type T denotes Dynamic X .Whether Changeable or not. 01-Aug-09 SAP System Note: We should not touch the Repository data of name space 'A' to 'X'. If it is performed remotely then it is said to be RAM (Remote access Method) Spool processes are configured by rdisp/wp_no_spo (Rdisp indicates instance specific) There should be at least 1 one Spool process in the entire system. It is also possible to have dedicated instances which will provide only spool processes PROGRAM[ RSPO1041] to maintain TEMSE. Printer specific format.e. We can configure as many as we can depending upon the available resources. SE11 > table name : /* (/ is a customer name space) . If the format is performed locally then it is said to be LAN (Local Access Method).

Note: STMS > System > Transport Tool no_import_all = 0 (No Mass Transportation) SPOOL MECHANISM Dialogue .BTC .74 TADIR is the repository TSTC .TBTC* . Market place > keys & Reqs > Development Name space. .TS* Tables Spool process reads from TEMSE and convert spool requests to the output requests (Printer specific requests). (Existing) Logical Spool Server. This is not existing but pointed to a Real spool/ another logical spool server. It is also referred as Real spool server. This is used for load balancing the spools. It is used to define output devices/ Spool servers and access methods Defining a Spool Server: The instance with atleast one spool process is referred as spool server.TS* Tables Dialogue --------------------.SPAD LPD .Is the T-Codes with the program name. SPOOL ADMINISTRATION TCODE .Line Print Demon Drivers are specific to O/S and not to SAP 1.

....Display then Change 3.. Execute SPAD 2... CONFIGURING THE OUT PUT DEVICE. Click on the Spool Server ....75 Note: We can set up a dedicated instance for spool process.. ......... 1... Click on create Server Name: LOGICAL SP1 Server Class : Mass Printing Logical Server: Mapping : willsys28_00 Alt server: .

Specify the Output device name Specify the description : Local Printer 7. Device type: HP Model & Manufacturer . Execute SPAD 2. Click on create 6.76 DEFINING OUTPUT DEVICE/ PRINTER 1. Click on display 4. Click on output device 3. Click on change 5.

. (either Local. If there is no device type available then select SAPWIN. Front End.) . Fax.. Print server. SPAD > Utilities > For device types > Import If the character set is required. Printer. SAP sends programs in terms of Patches.. -------------------Note: Dialogue --. If required write to SAP and try to get the device type. Spool process uses Access Methods to format the request. Device Class: (Standard.Author.77 Device type specifies that the output device is recognized by SAP.TEMSE -. Telex etc) Authorization Group : Specifies the access control methods Model: 2200 Location : 5th floor A wing.. Message : Only used by Pay Roll. Number of copies When printer is defined Spool server (LS/ RS) is assigned In order to print we need the spool process from the assigned instance to convert the spool request in to the output request.

If this parameter is not used spool congestion occurs. label printing.78 --------------------02-Aug-09 ACCESS METHODS It specifies the process of formatting the spool request to printer specific output request. two work processes can be used for front end printing. rdisp/wp_no_spo_fro_max = 2 i.e. Sensitive docs. This is more expensive.e. HSM. Disadvantages: No user can print in the background because the desktop initiation is not possible in the background during off peak hours. time consuming than any other methods. Jukebox (stores each copy (output doc)) Hierarchal storage machine . Restrict the no of work process that can go into front end mode using the parameter. the work process transfers the spool request to the spool system locally. LOCAL ACCESS METHOD The spool work process and the host spool resides in the same machine i. Select L Select C for UNIX based system (Local Print Method) for Windows (which uses direct operating system call) Select F for FRONT END printing Spool work process goes to the user desktop and format the request based on the printer that is connected to desktop. Specify I for Achieving device (Optical Devices. Advantages: Check printing.

It will transfer the formatting to remote system using SAP specific protocol SAPLPD For LOCAL & REMOTE For FRONT END > Needs the printer models > SAPWIN When Remote access method is specified we need the following HOST Printer: Destination HOST: i. It can be a print server. Note: Front end cannot be scheduled in the background. Specify U for UNIX operating system where formatting is performed on the remote machine (Print server) using Berkeley protocol.79 REMOTE ACCESS METHODS The formatting by spool work process is performed on remote system. Specify S for windows operating system.e. the printer should be configured on destination HOST. .

----The Major advantage of TEMSE is the documents can be displayed even before it is printed. It improves performance. if too many requests with this Status indicates need for increasing spool WP. users can monitor the requests using SP02. Output Attributes: Depends upon the company requirements. If this option is checked. Waiting 4.Minus' : Indicates not yet sent to the host system (No output requests exist) The spool process is busy/ congested. If the SAP spool system does not receive any status information from the host spool.80 SPOOL MONITORING SP01. Tray info is also similar. Spool Requests (Stores in Temse) Output Requests Note: Put a check mark [ ] Do not query host spooler for output requests. The system then sets the status to Complete (Competed or Error) The output request printed successfully. SP02 The spool requests are monitored in SP01. Printing : : : : Spool request is being generated (Stored in Spool system) Waiting for processing by spool The spool WP is formatting the output for printing The host spool is printing the output request. 2. Status '. In systems where the spool system does not receive any information about the host 6. If we need the exact status then uncheck the box. 1. Completed : . this status displayed for approximately one minute. Status '+' 3. In Process 5. SP01 is used to monitor the spool requests based on statuses.

We need to reorganize the spool requests using the SAP standard reports. the system changes to complete as soon as the output request is sent to the host spool. 7. User complain that they could not print documents to a specific printer. From SP01 --. In general the spool requests which are older than 14 days will be deleted if standard jobs are scheduled in SM36 they also checks the consistency of TEMSE periodically. .We can also use SPAD for reorganization of spool (but the logic is same) For this Execute . Printer issues like (Page setting issues.SPAD > Full ADMIN > ADMIN > Delete old spool requests Or from SA38 execute the program . Spool request cannot be generated . While changing the parameter we can set the priority between 1 . if required we can change the printer and reprint the document.Use Menu "Spool Request and print directly" or select print with changed parameters. RSPO0041. 1. Error : It indicates a server error such as network error.000 requests and log is generated in SM21 (System Log) . (RSPO1041. cartridge issues. RSPO0043).Transaction Codes [Lock/ Unlock] .Check the availability of the printer. . printer not available) paper out.10 (1 as High) 3. These are used to delete the old spool requests based on selection criteria. The requests have not printed and remain in the spool system until they are deleted or until they reach their expiration date and are deleted during a reorganization. TEMSE will be full when it reaches 99.Select the request -.RSPO0041 ----------Refer SM01 . print server not available) these printer specific issues will be resolved by Network Team/ Print Team. 2.81 spool . RSPO1043.The TEMSE is full i.e.

SPOOL TEMSE ADMINISTRATION It is used to monitor the memory allocated for TEMSE Note: If we need to forward a spool request select the request in SP01 and forward it to another user where user can print from alternative printer. SP01 : Spool request > Forward > (Client to client) Recipient : DDIC Use SBWP (SAP business work place) to display the request in inbox. The printer can be locked during maintenance in SPAD To process the requests sequentially based on serial numbers Select the option -. 03-Aug-09 .82 ---------SP12 . Similarly we should have enough output devices to avoid the print queues. SETTING DEFAULT PRINTER From SU01 we can specify default printer to the user but do not check the box "delete the request after output immediately" which improves the spool performance. If this is unchecked it prints faster but sequence is not maintained. Print sequentially consumes time to print in the order. PRINT QUEUES Note: Should have enough spool work process to format the requests to printer specific requests.[ ] print sequentially in SPAD from OP devices attributes tab.

SM69). Message server and enqueue BTC Expensive. OSCommands (SM49.gathers performance into ST03 BTC communicates with enqueue for locking and spool for print. . Gateway provides an interface so that the external system can communicate with SAP system on the specified port.3302 where 01.150 MB 5 . There will be only 1 gateway/ instance. External Programs (on Tar. If required we can also install a standalone gateway on a JAVA engine. finished. ready. active. Systems) TBTC* tables Standard background jobs Pause(rdisp/btctime. long running. Gateway is used to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP systems. SM37 Operation modes (RZ04. Gateway listens on port '3300'+instance number (3300.83 Dialogue 2 Min / Instance 75 . 02 are the instances).10 Users (Refer ST07) Handles request Interactively Multiplexing Rdisp/max_wp_runtime = 600 SM50/ SM66 wp_no_dia DPMON It initiates update. 3301. SM63) RSCOLL . wp_no_btc=0. Released. cancelled) Job step Program (SA38). BTC. time consuming No time limit Off peak time Scheduled to run periodically using variants Statuses (Scheduled. spool. GATEWAY WORK PROCESS SMGW SMGW is used to monitor the gateway process. btctrans1) Atleast 2 for the entire system SM36.

Do not modify these parameter under any circumstances on OS level. EDI. The profiles resides at OS level in the directory (usr\sap\<SID>\sys\profile). They can be managed/ edited using a notepad. Starting Sequence .84 When RFC's are defined between the systems they use SAP gateway when (ALE. Instance Profile As part of post installation we import the profiles of Active servers from RZ10. Default Profile It is used to provide global parameters for all the instances. Message server host. Startup 3. Startup Profile Startup profile consists of startup parameters like Starting Database Starting Message Server Dispatcher + Work. IDOC are transferring they use gateway) INSTANCE MANAGEMENT Instance is managed by using profiles. timeout parameters etc. Profiles will resides in (usr/sap/<SID>/sys/profiles) There are three types of Profiles 1. enqueue host) Instance Profile This is specific to instance configuration such as work process. buffer parameters. But the consistency is not checked (say for eg. User restrictions). So these profiles are imported into database management for consistency check and version management. Default 2. if we modify the instance profile WP DIA=2000 and there is no error message and versions are not maintained under OS level) DEV_DVEBMGS00_willsysdel. security parameters (Password.

Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting database. 2. There will be only one default profile in the entire system which provides global values. Eg. Total = 11 (including Central Instance) 11 X 2 per instance (Start + Instance) 22 22 + 1 (Default Instance) = 23 PROFILE MANAGEMENT Documentation for profiles are available in RZ10 Profiles resides in the table .85 1. 4.This is used to set the instance specific parameters.TPFYPROPTY RZ11 is also used to change some parameters dynamically without restarting the system but they will be reset once the system is restarted. RZ10 There are three types of Administration. Instance specific profile . . 3. message server and dispatcher in Central Instance. RZ10 changes are permanent The field type 'T' Specifies the dynamic parameters. How many profiles are available on a system with 10 Dialogue instances. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting (DISP+WORK) on dialogue instance.

86 1. GUI based using mouse . Basic Maintenance: It is used to maintain the profile parameters without any technical names. 2. It only specifies the path of the parameters. Administration data No need to maintain using this option.

The profile changes are updated at OS level and the existing profile is marked as . Extended Maintenance Used by administrator using parameter names Specify the input by including new parameters or modify the existing one. Profiles are changed on SAP recommendation or based on experience.Application Monitor: User Distribution SMLG .87 3. System will hang and may not restart. 04-Aug-09 LOGON LOAD BALANCING SMLG ST07 .ini . It will effect only after restarting the Server. Do not change any of the profiles on trail and error method.Logon groups sapmsg.BAK and a new profile is created in the profile directory. Copy > Save and Activate the profile.

SMLG > Define the groups and assign the instances. Buffers are optimally utilized. If the users are logging to different instances the buffers are scattered therefore they are not effectively used. Mechanism 1. Saplogon. User uses SAP GUI -groups option to login 2. 2. Identify the components along with users.88 Logon Load Balancing SMLG It is used to route the requests to the least loaded instance of that group.ini is used to display the available entries 3. So for this * Note: DDLOG is the synchronization table User A A+B =50 User B A+B =75 Buffer Synchronization 1. Factors to define LLB. User select group and click on logon. Load balancing to avoid long queues 3. Fail over (Logical) (As we are configuring logical system) Load balancing provides the following logon groups which are defined in SMLG. .

The data entered in the legacy system i.PO BI ---. There are 4 types of RFC's .e.Hostname of the message server Central instance (but not always) DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUES During the implementation of the legacy system needs to be preserved or used in the current system. But dealers and suppliers use non-SAP system so it is required to establish communication between SAP and NON SAP systems and perform the data transfer periodically. The request is routed to the favorite server.Transfer .Load SAP Hero Honda XML Non SAP Dealers SM59 RFC: REMOTE FUNCTION CALL RFC is used to communicate between SAP systems and SAP to Non-SAP systems using TCP/IP protocol.IP Address --. RFC's are defined in [SM59]. Invoices. account payables.INV Example: Reliance. saprfc. PO's. saplogon. ETL . sapdoccd. suppliers.89 4.ini. Message server communicates will all the dispatchers and identifies the least loaded server and mark it as a favorite server in SMLG. using SAP. Billing. Shipping are to be transferred periodically(Hourly) bi-hourly(for every 4 hrs) or daily SO --. 6.ini to identify the message server and etc/services for message server port. When the user select group. The dispatcher process the request normally. After go live both systems SAP and legacy travel parallely. employees and salaries. Example: Customer implemented SAP but the employees who are old cannot make use of SAP system. So there is need to transfer the legacy system data to SAP system. They would like to work on the traditional systems. supplier details.ini (For library). Example: A customer/ company is running business for the past 30 Years. account receivables and P&L (Profit and Loss). saproute. Sapmsg. He is maintaining customer details. Hero Honda [B2B Company to Dealers] not B2C [Distributers to customers] they communicate with dealers.ini 5.Extract . It looks for sapmsg. This information is required by the customer in SAP System.ini. vendor details.ini ---.

(Like a post card).. Asynchronous RFC 2. Queue RFC 1. Transactional RFC . Transaction SM58 is used for Transactional RFC.90 1. all the resources are used up. Asynchronous RFC . (like a register post).It is an advanced version of TRF and ensures that the transaction is committed based on FIFO/ Queue. Target system/ Receiving system may be busy i. i. SMQ2 .TRFC . 2. Note: SAP uses CPIC protocol SAP specific (Common Programming Interface for Communication) to communicate between system. It gets an acknowledgement from the target system. This is consistence and reliable. This is reliable but time consuming and expensive (Client Copy) the job should get finished. The request goes to receiving system if it is not handled a Transaction ID is generated by the source system.e. Transactional RFC 4. . The transmission is not reliable.. Synchronous RFC 3. It ensures transaction consistency of LUW and reliability of data transmission. It is used to document all the transactional ID's and ensure that they are received by the recipient system. Berkley UNIX PRINTER CPIC SRFC 3. Example : Central user administration.Provides interface to monitor Inbound queues. SMQ1 . If the receiving system is not available the process goes into RFC/ CPIC/ Sleep mode and waits until it is wakened by the target system.It is an advanced version of ARFC and SRFC.It is not like ARFC. A program RSARFCSE is scheduled in the background to run for every 60 seconds. The sending system may or may not receive it.e. Synchronous RFC .to monitor the outbound queues of a sending system refer SCOTT for FAX. there is no acknowledgement from the receiving . Queued RFC . A user is created in the parent client and transferred to the child client when they are available? 4.

Logical system number should be <SID>CLNT<CLNT_Number> Eg. Define Logical System (<SID>CLNT009) 3. Central User Administration SCUA Goto > BD64 or SALE > To define the sending systems and receiving systems Or Use the SAP standard moral for that application. From 000/ Sapuser Execute SCUA / .Provide the name of the logical system 2. Test Connection. Description about the connection 4. Logon Language) 6. Each system is identified by SID. DEVCLNT900 To identify the systems easily by name 1. Defining RFC Connection . Logon Security (Client. Example: To configure central user administration SCUA Tcode is used.technically 1000 client can be created in one system. Save the connection. SM59 . Remote logon Perform three times to add 3 systems. Technical settings (Host name and Instance No) 5. Select the connection type '3' 3. So. Preciously SAP is client based (A mandatory field while login) Each client is defined with a logical system name that is defined in SALE.SM59 1. Goto > SALE > Basic Settings > Logical System 2. client by 3 digit number. So we need to identify which client is the business client. There should be unique SID in the Landscape. (Sap System linking and enabling).SALE SAP systems consists of more than one client . UID.91 05-Aug-09 DEFINING SYSTEMS .model : willsys > Create (The logged in system is treated as Sending system) We need to define recipient/ receiving systems . PWD. Assign logical system to the client.

define systems and SAVE . ALE .. EDI .Execute SM58 (Transactional RFC) Users are distributed to the child client using TRFC(SM58) and if the client system is not Available the record hangs in SM58 and ensure that is updated in the child client.NON SAP.Electronic Data Interchange It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP systems. It will be in the Understandable format of both sending and receiving systems. It wont allows us to create because the receiving systems will become a Child system.Being in parent create an user assigning profile SAP_ALL .SAP to SAP only.92 DEVCLNT001 DEVCLNT000 DELCLNT001 save to configure CUA Goto back end systems Try to execute SU01 and create an user .Stop the other systems . SAP . To delete : Execute report : RSDELCUA or SCUA select the client and delete. IDOCS (Intermediate Documents) are used to transfer the data. WE05 is the Tcode to monitor the IDOCS SCUL to check the logs WE05 > Status . SCUM is performed only in the Parent System Eg: Consider a Scenario .

system dumps. memory and CPU technically. 06-Aug-09 Status (Killed. Programs) PROCESS MONITORING SM50 (INSTANCE)/ SM66 (GLOBAL) .states that the document is posted .states there is a syntax error. Reports. Failed spool requests.States that the application document not posted fully. Free. btc failures. work load on the system (Users. Transactions. RFC failures..states that there is error in the port . database logs. system logs. It is used to monitor the health of systems in terms of storage. Tcode IDOC to check the consistency WE21 to identify the ports for IDOC processing.are the outbound IDOCS and above are the inbound IDOCS .. dead locks. . SYSTEM MONITORING Gateway is a port that listens on 3300. pending updates. Ended. Instance is down) But on SAP front we need to monitor the process utilization.93 0 to 49 50 52 53 02 07 .

Task Manager or Kill -9 Command on UNIX. Note : Rdisp/gui_auto_logout = 900 sec ---. Dialogue process should not consume more than 1-2 seconds for normal tasks. If BTC is running for longer times check whether it is permissible as per the process document.To define the Back ground Job . Identify the user.Select Lock Entries .Spool Standard Jobs . The process has to complete the job or Heap Memory should exhaust. If more number goes into PRIV we may need to restart the instance. stopped. hold.Maintain Operation Modes .JOB monitor . We may need to kill the processes with status PRIV using DPMON. Select MANDT.Display/ Maintain Operation Mode Set .USR02 group by MANDT. client.Update program Administration (Deactivate) . Action. Count(*) as Total from DEV. UGLAG from USR02 128 . It will be automatically down (Killed) by system in 600 Seconds. so that process comes out. Do not change the status of users in the USR02 Table.Self Locked 64 Administrator Lock never becomes 0 ------------------Refer SM12 SM13 SM14 SM36 SM37 SM21 ST22 RZ04 SM63 SP01 . BNAME.Update requests . time. Monitor the processes with status(reasons) running.ABAP Dumps/ Runtime Error .94 Monitor the instance specific processes in SM50 and Global Specific Process overview based on status in SM66. If it is not killed the process might be occupied by dedicated resource and uses heap memory with status PRIV.Deletes the batch job logs . It will be created with Password pass.Example --User pwd forgotten and all the users are locked if SAP* is deleted. Refer : select MANDT.System Log .Output controller . RFC/ CPIC. sleep.RSBTCDEL . PRIV.

0 Installation Exports [1 of 4 ] Kernel.Global Work Process overview WE05 .Spool Reorganization. Number Provide PID.RSPO1043 . 07-Aug-09 Market Place > SAP Support Portal > Suserid> >Downloads > Installation Upgrades > My Company Components SAP Solution Manager 7.IDOC List SMQ1 . Eg: BSI (British Standard Institute) requests the consultants to monitor the system on hourly basis.Process Overview SM51 .User List.Delete Old ABAP Dumps .RSSNAPDL .RSPO1041 .95 .RSMO13002.Active SAP Servers SM66 . . Java Components > Add to download Basket Paste in <SID>\sys\exe\UC | Install the download manager SYSTEM MONITORING Each customer provides a standard check list to monitor their systems from time to time.Delete Old spool logs and files .Delete old update request logs .RFC Destination SM50 . SM59 .When the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass) Process the list @ OS Level DPMON K Provide SR.RSCOLL00 .Collects performance info in Transaction ST03 .QRFC (outbound) queue SMQ2 . DPMON .QRFC (Inbound) queue SM04 .

SM50 identifies the process which are long running. Identify the instances which are down i. 2. ---08-Aug-09 TRANSPORT GROUPS Note: usr\sap\trans can be on JOD. we need to report with high priority.e. Transport Groups with individual transport directories.96 P&G requests their production systems to be monitored periodically for every 8 Hrs. If any instance is down. ---IMPORT ABAP : c:\prog files\sapinst_instdir\erp\system\ora\central\as Err. Security On JOD > . Analyse the reason for failure (Check if the system is scheduled for downtime) If we are authorized start the instance and if it could not be started then look into work directory for logs. exe. JOQ. Check lists contains the following 1. JOP or on separate disk. SM51 to list the servers and monitor the instances which are up and running. Ok.

Similarly perform the to include production into DC 5. Domain name will be Domain<SID> Save the Domain. Execute STMS > Will prompt to create a transport Domain. From DC From Menu Overview > Systems JOD JOQ JOP Select the system JOP from SAP System Menu > Click on approve. We need to include systems in the DC. Select Icon > Other Configuration [][] Include System in Domain Pops up DC Host/ Target Host : JOMLERTDEV DC Sys No/ System No: 00 SAVE Upon saving the request from quality system is sent to DC to include in the domain. Login to DC (Domain Controller) Development System/ 000 client with user like DDIC 2.Perform Post Installation DICO STMS From Menu Overview > Systems Extras > Delete TMS configuration or execute DICO 1. 4. Select the system JOQ and click on Approve from Menu SAP System > Approve . 3. Login to the DC 6. Login to Quality system Execute STMS > As DC is already created from the above step.97 Perform SICK SE06 > Standard Installation .

Say YES Note: In principle there will be only one client in the production system. 3 . SAVE. JOQ --.Transport directories are configured. Defining the Landscape From the DC/ 000/ DDIC > Goto STMS Click on the icon transport routes Click on change Menu .2 Clients [Test. > Continue > SAVE Three system configuration .Configuration > Standard configuration > Three systems in group. they maintain transport groups themselves i. 7.98 TRANSPORT GROUP If each system has their own transport group i. Double Click on the system JOD from Communication Tab From Transport Group Tab change mode Provide Name : Group_JOD Perform the same for JOQ. Training] . UNIT Testing] SYSTEM MONITORING SM51 SM50/ SM66 SM13 SM14 SM37 SP01 .e.1 Client JOD---.2 Clients [DEV and Customizing.UNIT TEST JOP ---.e.

AL08 SM04 SM21: System logs specific to the instance. This TCODE is also used to logoff the user session if required. Identify the users who are consuming more memory and also identify the transactions and identify why it is consuming more time. .99 SM04/ AL08 : Used to identify the number of users logged on to the instance. We can also identify the logs of other instances. System log > Remote system It is used to display the logs for the following activities.

Segment Management. As a part of monitoring we need to identify the messages with color red. Time out errors Identify the error message from the log and search in the market place. Divide Error 1/0 2. 5. It displays the logs based on date/time.Screen and a dump is recorded in ST22.100 1. Illegal attempts and user locks 6. . 4. t-code & problem class. Infinite Loops. 7. Session Termination due to network failures. Archive Stuck. All ABAP dumps are documented 3. Update (Lags in Memory) 3. 8. ST22 recovers the following 1. When we delete SM12 the locks are logged. System Startup/ Work process log 2. All the database related errors like Space issues. user. ST22 ABAP DUMPS When ever a SAP Program (ABAP program) could not be executed due to an error it will be thrown out from the GUI.

Holds the transaction and the Program name TSTCT . endless loops. improper select statements etc. 09-Aug-09 PERFORMANCE TUNING ST02 .101 1. SWAP. Enqueue Table Overflow: SM12 6. Update Deactivation : SM14 7.Holds the description/ text of a T-Code. the above error occurs. 8. Stop the AS and change the date if not. Program Corrections: The problem is with SAP standard program for which SAP provides a correction through notes (The correction can be applied through SNOTE) 4. Database issues like table space over flow. Note TSTC . Illegal time: (Day light savings) . OUT OF MEMORY. This error requires memory corrections to the parameters. Memory related issues with error message PXA. Customer defined programs ('Y'. 5. archive stuck.During day light savings the system date and time has to be changed. max-extents reached. 'Z') consumes more memory. PAGE. 3. TIME_OUT error: The rdisp/max_wprun_time program requires more time than the time defined in 2. The program need to be corrected by the developer.

Front End Time/ GUI Time : Time taken by the user to reach the dispatcher is called as Front end time. Roll in Time: The work process copies the Roll in User context into WP task handler. 1. If this is same with all the users. Generally it should not be more than 50 M.Sec. If it is more than this consider the following. (1:5) 2. If the time exceeds. 1. User desktop is slow 2. 3. If it exceeds this consider the following. The time taken by the work process to copy the context (Roll In) is referred as Roll in time. The work process are not sufficient to handle the user requests. The user request is expensive (FI and basis will logon to the central instance. parameters) . Rest of all the users are allowed to login to Dialogue instance) Note: GUI response time is not considered as a part of the Dialogue response time because the request is not received by the dispatcher. The user context is heavy to Roll in (User might having more authorizations. 3. 1. Wait Time: The amount of time the user request sits in the queue.Sec or 10% of the response time. consider the following.Sec.102 This complete journey should be completed within 600 Milli seconds on an average or goes up to 600 Seconds Max. Generally it should not be more than 50 M. The GUI time should not exceed more than 200 M. 2. There are sufficient processes but the existing process are held with expensive request. network might be congested. 1. Login/disable_multi_gui_login.

The processing time should not be more than 200 M. ST05 Performance Analysis) 8. Processing Time: The time taken by the work process to process the user request using interpreters. Enqueue time should be 5 M. 6.Wait time). Roll Out Time: The time taken by the work process to copy the information from its local memory to Roll Area/ Roll File/ User context/ Roll buffer and it should not be more than 50 M. Roll wait time Sleep Note: Roll wait time is not considered as a part of response time. If the roll wait time increases consider there is a bottle next on the RFC communication. Run SGEN tcode after patch application. LG Time: Load and Generation Time: Time required to load the objects such as source code. Minimize the authorizations. 10. If the processing time is more we can consider either ABAP program is expensive.Sec on a Dialogue instance. upgrade. If it exceeds more than this time we can consider that the enqueues are not sufficient or Enqueue table overflow. GUI info.Sec. (Refer LC10 : Live Cache). CPU Time: When the request are processed using interpreters an amount of CPU is utilized to process the request using CPU resources is referred as CPU time. CPU time should not be more than (40% of the Dialogue response time . 9. Enqueue Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with enqueue for obtaining the lock while updating a record is referred as Enqueue time.Target system.Sec. As CPU time is included in processing time it is not calculated in the response time. screen info from the database and generate these objects. 4. . on a Central instance and 100 M. Roll Wait Time: During the processing when a dialogue process communicates with RFC's and waiting for the response at this time the user context is copied/ rolled back to BTC ---. It should not be more than 200 M. It should be as minimal as possible.RFC --. new installation or when there is a mass change in the programs. or WP waiting for a lock. 5. RFC or CPIC Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with external interfaces is referred as RFC time. Sec. screen is expensive or SQL statements are expensive. 7. (Communication between any BW/ CRM/ SCM system).103 2.Sec. There wont be any threshold value as it depends on External system. If CPU time is more consider tuning ABAP Programs Refer to ABAP development team (Also Refer SE30 ABAP Run time Analysis.

Missing indexes in DB02. Generally it should not be more than 40% of (Response time . Dialogue Response time: The time taken by the Dialogue process to process the request which includes [Wait time .Average Time # Indicates ...e. MEMORY Physical Memory: The memory that is available or the memory that is configured on the instance using the parameter PHYS_MEMSIZE. Resource bottle neck on DB. 2. If the response time is more and dialogue steps of fewer 1 or 2 then the average response time could not be worked out.104 11. IF DB Time is more consider the following. 3.. Select Expert Mode to identify the expensive programs. It is similar to the CPU time. * PHYS_MEMSIZE: This parameter restricts the usage of memory by that instance. The DB Buffers are not sufficient.Total Time 10-Aug-09 WORK LOAD ANALYSIS ST03 ST03 It is used to calculate the work load analysis.. The DB statistics job is not scheduled in DB13... reports and users. Ф Indicates .. The response time should be worked out only when there are atleast 10... Virtual Memory: The physical memory and SWAP memory/ Pagging Memory on the disk The physical memory will not be sufficient to provide the users for temporary work area/ Calculations/ so a part of the disk which is configured for SWAP is used. While calculating the average consider the number of dialogue steps of the transaction user.. 12.Wait time). Database Time: The time taken by the process to reach the database and process the request. To . The DB resources are stake(CPU and Memory Utilization) i.000 dialogue steps... Roll Out Time] [Wait time + RI + RO + PI +LG + RFC + DB +ENT] Note: Team Viewer is the Remote Desktop support Software BOMGAR. 4. 1... transactions.. .

105 On UNIX during installation assign atleast 20GB of SWAP. On windows assign atleast 3*RAM size/ 20 GB which ever is higher. Shared Memory: The memory that is used by all the applications (OS, DB, R/3) Extended Memory: The memory that is used by SAP work processes is referred as Extended Memory. Local Memory: The memory that is assigned to work process is referred as Local Memory Roll Memory/ Roll Buffer: The memory that is used by work process to store the user context information is referred as Roll memory. Private/ Heap Memory: The memory that is used by work process exclusively by restricting itself. MEMORY ALLOCATION 1. User submits the request. 2. Dispatcher assigns the WP 3. WP requires memory to Roll -In the user context. 4. WP gets memory from local memory which is defined in the parameter ztta/roll_area. It gets only a part of it which is defined by parameter ztta/roll_first (20KB) 5. If the allocated memory is not sufficient then it gets allocated from Extended memory ztta/roll_extension. 6. If that is also not sufficient then it uses the remaining ROLL Area. 7. If that is also not sufficient then it uses HEAP/ PRIVATE Memory and the WP goes into PRIVATE Mode. 8. Heap memory is defined by the parameter Abap/heaplimit=4GB Abap/heap_area_dia Transaction ST02 provides the memory utilization 9. Each dialogue uses abap/heap_area_dia and non dia uses abap/heap_area_nondia both process should not exceed abap/heap_area_total. Memory : RAM is the first Memory. Out of this we don't want to allow SAP to utilize the whole memory. Virtual Memory: Pagefile.sys 11-Aug-09


User ---> Dispatcher ---> WP ---> Rolls Its Memory Requires Memory to Roll In to the Task Handler Ztta/roll_first - 20KB Extended Memory is used by all the Work Processes. 20 KB ztta/roll_first through ztta/roll_area Extended Memory ztta/roll_extension : 512 MB Come back to local Memory If all the memory is consumed it cant come back so goes to the Heap/ Private Memory. CASE STUDY We have configured 20 WP in the Instance and we know pretty well that each user request consumes a minimum of 25MB of Memory WP 1 2 . . 8 9 MEMORY Roll_first 20KB 20KB 4GB Roll_extn 512MB 512MB 8GB Heap 2GB 2GB STATUS PRIV PRIV

Roll_Area 19.980MB 19.980MB






107 Rdisp/max_priv_time When the process uses Heap Memory it is used in Heap/ Private mode. The processes which are in PRIV Mode cannot be timed out by Rdisp/max_wprun_time Rdisp/max_priv_time So configure so that the process is timed out after this time (600 Seconds/ 10 Minutes) when the work process goes into PRIV mode it will not listen to rdisp/max_wprun_time=600sec. It will be released only after the task completion or Memory is exhausted(Abap/heap_area_dia)/ timed out by rdisp/max_priv_time. This situation is referred as Hour Glass Mode or WP Congestion. At this situation we can use DPMON or SM04 to terminate the user session. If not kill the process at OS level based on PID.

Q. The user complains that he could not login to the system - Hour Glass Mode? A. 1. WP into PRIV Mode 2. ARCHIVE STUCK (The user could not update any record and results in hour glass mode) BUFFERS ST02

The frequently used content and less frequently modified is eligible for buffering. Company Name, GUI, screens, calendars, table definitions, programs etc are eligible for buffering. Data such as Exchange Rates, Transactional Data(PO, Sales Order, Invoice, Billing) are not eligible for buffering. Buffering is specific to instance. Each buffered element is stored in the memory of the instance in terms of Directories and Space. Eg. Programs can be stored up to 150000 KB, 150 MB in 37,500 directories. If the directories/ size is full then Buffer Swaps occurs in ST02. When SWAP occurs the content needs to be fetched again from Database which increases the response time.


108 RAISING A REQUEST TO SAP FOR A SAP ROUTER From the Market Place www.service.sap.com > click on SAP Support Portal. > From Help and Support Tab > click on Report a Product Error From Here Provide Customer : Installation : System ID :

Company Name JOD

Next > Search Term : SAP Router Or Go with Message Select the system & select the component Raise a request as follows: Dear SAP, We have installed solution manager and 3 ERP systems in the landscape. Before we start implementation we would like to establish connecting with SAP using SAP Router. Name of the Server : JOMLSOLMAN IP Address : (This is where our SAPRouter is going to be configured) We are using dedicated public IP Address SID INSTANCE NO : JOS : 00

Please send us certificate details. { Open the connectivity, How many hours it needs to be opened; Provide Userid and password/ Client } Provide your name Hit SEND Note: from Market Place > My Profile > Maintain Single Sign on Certificate > Specify Password. R. Shunmugam Phone No:

109 From Market place > Check the email. SAP : JOLSOLMAN ---------------Earlier from the Back End system say for eg: SOLMAN system 001/ DDIC > Login to the SOLMAN system Discontinued from 2006 TCODE > OSS1 (Online SAP Service) From Menu Parameter > Technical Settings Hit Change SAPRouter at SAP

Note: Instance 98 ( Is for SOLMAN Diagnostic Tool), 99(SAP Router) All kind of services can be acquired from OSS1

Over the web using DIAG protocol. (It is discontinued) ---------------4 systems in the landscape SAP Router is a software program which is used to restrict to access the customer systems using the table SAPROUTTAB. SAPROUTTAB is a text file with out any extension in the router directory with prefix P, D and S (Permit, Deny and Secure sometimes)

STEPS TO CONFIGURE SAP ROUTER 1. Create a directory with name saprouter in usr\ sap\directory. usr\sap\saprouter Ensure that the folder has full (Read + Write permissions)


Note SAPRouter is an executable in the kernel directory (usr\sap\SID\sys\exe\uc\NTi386). Nipping is an executable to ping to the router. This two executables needs to be copied to the router directory. However we can also download from market place. On Windows> Check whether the SAPRouter service is running or not to make sure whether the SAPRouter is already configured or not. 2. From Market Place > My Company App Components Look for SAPROUTER700 Windows server X64 Click on Add to download basket. 3. Login as <SID>ADM 4. Create a sub directory E:\usr\sap\saprouter 5. From Command Prompt Change directory to trans as it is holding the downloaded files E:\usr\sap\trans> sapcar -xvf saprouter_12_100004305.sar 6. copy the two uncared files in to the saprouter directory. 7. From market place click on Download Area > SAP Cryptographic Software .sar file.

It depends on OS We can download either CAR or SAR file


Paste the file in usr\sap\saprouter sapcar -xvf 90000114.car ----------Note: Download Manager > Configuration > SUSERID and PWD -----------

8. Create a service called SAPRouter service. From Command Prompt > Saprouter> ntscmgr install SAPRouter -b E:\usr\sap\saprouter\saprouter.exe - p "JOSADM" It will create a service. JOS is the SID 9. Define a file SAPROUTTAB Create a file SAPROUTTAB in the saprouter dir with out any extension

10. SNC (Secured Network Connection Needs to be added) For this Goto > www.service.sap.com/SAPROUTER-SNCADD Apply Copy [ Shows the Distinguished Name] > Hit Continue 11. Define the Environment Variable. My Comp > Properties > Advanced> Variable : SECUDIR Path: E:\usr\sap\saprouter Variable :SNC_LIB Path: E:\sur\sap\saprouter\nt-X86_64\sapcrypto.dll Sapcrypt.dll to encrypt and decrypt the messages. 12. Generating certificate from Customers End (SOLMAN System) Use the command Sapgenpse.exe will be in nt-X86_64 so goto

SAPSR3 .msc > saprouter From Logon Tab Select This Account : JOSADM Apply -------------------------------------------To Uninstall Ntscmgr install saprouter -b E:\..SAP Generic Personal Security Encryption 13.pse 15.112 Saprouter> CD nt-X86_64 Saprouter\nt-X86_64> sapgenpse get_pse -v -r certreq -p local.pse -o JOSADM Will create a file cred_v2 16. being in nt-X86_64 > sapgenpse seclogin -p local. 17. SAPROUTTAB > open with notepad > copy the whole content (from already configured system) > provide> SAP IP > Our IP.9 .14 SAPSR2 .. Router as Service Services...pse "Paste the distinguished name" Prompts for PIN : any password Twice Sapgenpse ... Importing the Certificate Nt-X86_64> sapgenpse import_own_cert -c srcert -p local.. Now copy from BEGIN to END from SAP that site/ Screen Paste it in a notepad file(without extension) with file name srcert in the folder nt-X86_64 14.. Work file certreq in \nt-X86_64 Open with notepad And copy from BEGIN to END Paste in the STEP 10 in the text box and hit Continue Click on request certificate It generates a text with BEGIN to END. TO check the Distinguished name Sapgenpse get_my_name -v -n issuer 18.

SAP able to connect and we need to provide authentication 3. SAP Router provides the authorization and we need to provide the authentication.227. Market place > connect to SAP > R/3 Support > Open connection .124.2.12. SAP router side will restrict the user. Execute SM59 SAPOSS > Change IP Address of SAPRouter at Customer Side And also change at SAP Side Router String --------------------------------------Goto Market Place Download service connection Maintain Data > System Data SOLMAN Production System Goto DB Server Hostname > SOLMAN IP Address : 124. The password will be visible [ ].19 OS : NT/ INtel Version : Win2003 DB Release : 9.113 SAPSR1 .8.6 -----------------------------------------19.0.202/s/3299 Create New Connection RFC Connection Logon Security E1 001 SCO4013677 AISUSER tcode ------------------------------------- 13-Aug-09 SAP ROUTER Theory 1.0 Router String:> H/220.194. Maintain our systems in the Market Place 2.

SAR .Compressed Archive Kernel comes with ..exe and NIPPING. IP Address and Customer Number (SAP Router need not to be installed on Solution Manager /DEV/ QAS/ PRD..114 Take out the access from SCC4. SAP Router is an executable which is used to restrict the access to the customer systems over the network.. Download the Cryptography files from Market place related to OS and bit version (Download *. It needs to be configure before implementation Part of SAP.CAR . 3. D .SAP Archive . SA38.service. Create SAP Router directory and copy the executables from exe\uc\NTi386 or download from the market place.com/swdc) copy only SAPCAR. Copy and Paste certificate from Begin to End the market place url /Saprouter-SNCADD .DB .SAR files) 5. Create message to SAP along with your SAP Router [Hostname]. SAP responds with Distinguished name. SAPROUTER. Uncar the files into SAPRouter directory 6. but it is advised to install on SOLMAN system to ensure that it is monitored periodically.exe. 8. executable used to generate the personal security environment.Deny.Dialogue Instance Usr\sap 2. -------------RMMAIN tcode only in SOLMAN Implementation Road Map > Technical Infrastructure Planning > Order for Remote Connection to SAP Project Preparation Phase. ------------SAP Router 1. SE38. (www. P Permit. sapgenpse. .sap. Cust Number : When we buy SAP we will be provided with the customer number. It works like a firewall/ proxy to permit and deny the access to the SAP systems. Generate the certificate using distinguished "DN" name with executable SAPGENPSE.. K -SNC (Secure network connection) 7.. SAPROUTETAB is a file (without any extension) used to have ACL (Access Control List) S .Secure. It can be installed on any desktop.exe 4....SAR only [Global Host] ...Central Instance .

Request a certificate from the market place copy into srcert. BUFFER HIT RATIO. Goto SMP ---. Used to monitor the buffer swaps on the Application Server/ Instance LRU . The content is frequently modified 3. BUFFER SWAPS indicate the following 1. Analysis has to be carried out if there are atleast 10. Analysis: Identify the buffer areas whose swaps/ Database access are more. Inform SAP to connect to our systems. 10. SAPOSS. When more swaps occur they are displayed on ST02 in swaps column. --------------------------------------------ST02 continuation.Open connection by selecting the service---.Maintain System Data -.Specify no of days and hours. Do no take any decisions based on the readings on a specific day. Import the certificate into router system using SAPGENPSE 11.Start service connector -. On each backend system we need to maintain the RFC details in OSS1 Transaction.Maintain Router details ------.Report Error --.Connect to SAP Select the system . It will update SAPOSS RFC Connection. SAPSNOTE are created on communicating with the Market Place. No Sufficient space or directories 2. During the restart and when support packages are applied and when upgrade is performed. .115 9. Similarly maintain all the other systems in the landscape. Buffer swaps occurs when there are no sufficient directories or space. Mass transportation of objects 4. SAP-OSS. Start the router using command saprouter -r -k "DN" 12. The configured buffers are small 5.Least Recently used.000 requests.Download service connector -. 13.

no prog/ no data is available in the file system) There are four types of Buffering 1. In order to synchronize buffers set the parameter . T001 Company info 3. EKKO (PURCHASE) BUFFER SYNCHRONIZATION When more than one application server is configured then buffers between different instances may not be synchronized. No Buffering: The tables which are large frequently used. (This is fully buffered) 2. (Also which are small in size) Eg: T000 have all the clients and required to create a client copy.116 SAP recommends this value to be around 98% {For every 100 request '2' request goes to database and the remaining should be from the buffers} Key areas that effect the performance are program buffers. Generic Buffering 3. VBAK (SALES). Change the program buffer using ABAP/ buffer_size to a maximum of 600 MB on 32 bit Machines. frequently used and rarely modified are buffered using a primary key. Remaining parameters based on SAP recommendation from RZ11. and frequently modified are not eligible for buffering. Single Record Buffering 4. TABLE Buffering SAP stores the content in tables (Every data except start and stop logs is stored in DATABASE. table buffers and Table and Field definitions. Generic Buffering: Tables which are relatively large. FULL Buffering 2. 1. rarely modified using a set of keys (Fields) Eg: USR02. Full Buffering: The tables which are frequently used and rarely modified are eligible for buffering. 4. Single Record Buffering: The tables which are large in size. frequently used. No Buffering This is maintained for each table SE13 refer USR02 Table..

by that time it will be synchronized between APP1 and APP2. IF there are no updates fetches the same from APP1 Buffer. It is used to display the database buffer hit ratio. . SE01 All the programs is in Uncompiled mode in TADIR table. User1 request to APP1 for update Sales order to Rs. SGEN . T001. It is recommended that it should not be less than 94% i.SQL server performance analysis.117 Rdisp/ buffermode = Send on. 500 @ 10:00:01 2.550 @ 10:00:20 3. for every hundred reads only 6 should goes to the database.All the programs are stored in TADIR. If there is any change then it will fetch from DB and swap out the buffer. Mechanism 1.Database hit ratio comes down below 94% then consider the following. User2 request to APP2 for update the same sales order to Rs. Refer . TSTC. (DDLOG is a buffer synchronization table). EO70. . Rdisp/ buffertime = 60 Sec. DB buffer. DDLOG is a synchronization between instances and maintain TIMESTAMP Note: DB13. DB02.Compiles the programs 14-Aug-09 ST04 DB PERFORMANCE MONITOR .e. User3 request APP1 for display @ 10:00:40 WP will ask DDLOG table to check for recent update within 60 Sec. exec auto. If the content is requested after 60 Seconds.

In this scenario we advice to deploy additional instances. 2. Memory Utilization and disk response time. .118 1. The CPU idle time should not be less than 30% [For Portal up to 80% to 85%] If it is below 30% we can consider the following. The CPU is not sufficient to handle the load because the hardware is not procured as per sizing.Physical Reads]/ Logical Reads * 100 Logical Reads is the sum of [Physical reads and Buffer Reads] (Buffer Gets/ Reads) FROM ST04 Physical Reads: The reads from the database. 3. If not memory bottleneck. 1. Ensure that physical memory free is available to handle the user requests. It is calculated by using formulae [ Logical reads . Ensure that DB Buffers are configured as per the available memory. If OSCOL is not started ST06 will be blank. If the programs are expensive then refer to development team. It also displays the memory installed on the machine. ST06 OSMONITOR It Fetches the data using service SAPOSCOL and it displays CPU Utilization. The ABAP programs are expensive with multiple conditions and endless loops. DB Buffer size is not sufficient to hold the content fetched from the database. Memory available(Free) along with the SWAP space. Some times complete memory will be dedicated to DB Buffers. It is also used to start and stop SAPOSCOL (during Upgrades) Note: OSCOL brings the operating system information into ST06. If the buffer hit ratio comes down it effects on the DB response time. Frequent updates on the database 2. Probably the hardware is procured as per sizing but the number of users grown dynamically (300600).

119 We can check TOP CPU utilization for the current in the last 24 Hrs. If a user complaints that he could not connect to the server (Ping to the desktop) . LAN CHECK BY PING is used to ping to all the systems in the Network/ Landscape.

Say for Eg: from the below screen. .120 Click on Presentation Server ST07 Used to identify whether the system is optimally designed or not. Users are 9944 and the WP are 27 so each WP serves 5-10 Users so 27*10 = 270 Here users are including Active and Inactive Users.

AL11 : List the SAP Directories on Application Server. Based on the number of servers we can also define logon load balancing. When the RFC/ CPIC time are going beyond threshold value then switch on RFC Trace.121 Ask the customer to provide the list of Active users. Calculate the number of Process Vs Users to determine no of Users/ Process. It is also used to identify the memory utilized. Authorization Trace 6. Kernel Trace Available in ST01 and ST05 Only in ST01 1. When more buffer swaps occurs in the table buffering ST02. SQL Trace 5. Buffer Trace 3. It displays the log files related to work process. . Enqueue Trace 4. 2. Each work process serves around 5-10 Users. This is also used to identify Response time and Buffers Utilization. ST11: It is used to display the work directory. ST01 and ST05 Used to trace the following 1. Switch on Buffer Trace. RFC Trace 2.

7. Switch Off the trace. (Identify those statements in ST04) Eg. It will populate enormous log files and occupies the complete disk place and system stands still.122 3. Motivation of SAP for an ERP Software Landscape Deployment Plan Hardware Sizing Hardware and Software Order Installation of the Software Post Installation Steps User management Router -----. 10.Sec on CI(Central Instance) 100 M. Enqueue Trace: When the enque or enque wait time is increasing by 5 M. 2. It records all the calls that are made to kernel when the trace is ON.Sec on Dialogue instance (Consider switching enqueue trace) 4. 11. 4. 3. 5. 5.Remote connection to SAP Landscape Configuration Transport Management Testing Strategy . As a practice switch on the trace and inform the user to run the transaction. Authorization Check: Whenever user encounters missing authorizations and could not be traced in SU53 can be traced out by switching the trace on User. 6. 6. Kernel Trace: Used to identify the consistency of Kernel. When there are too many expensive SQL Statements which are increasing the database response time in ST04 then switch on SQL Trace. 9. ST04 > Detailed > Oracle Session > SQL Statements. Note: Do not switch on the traces when they are not required. RC=0 (Return Code) Note: Tuning is not testing we need enormous analysis and data to justify the conclusion. 8. Select * from can be fine tuned by using select single * from with appropriate where conditions. 17-Aug-09 IMPLEMENTATION OF SAP Pre-Requisites 1.

incremental. It cannot communicate with print. The customer could not be competitive in the market due to the legacy methods deployed B1 . Pager. fax.Description ---. 13. fonts.) 3.C++ No ABAP.1. The software is not user friendly to take the user inputs. ergonomically designed.The software should be unicoded language to support all the languages. The existing Hardware is old and the response times are high.The software should be installed on all the operating systems and databases. Disaster Recovery. Restore etc. PDA etc. MOTIVATION OF SAP FOR AN ERP 1.123 12.The software should support (Online. 6.The software/ Hardware should support mirroring. SMS. 15. Email. 7. PWC (Price Water Coupons) are the auditors to identify the requirements in the company. Customer wanted to deploy an application that suites to his requirements by replacing the existing software due to the following reasons. hardware and the Implementer. colors. clustering. 14. Go Live Strategy Parallel Run Go-Live Support . RAID. languages. The software is out of maintenance with no updates. table level backup) . 2. Fax. partial. KPBG. too little integration.Possible/ Not Possible/ Customizable/ If customizable Amount of effort. . Offline. user friendly. manual inputs. monitoring are the various issues with the current software.Phase 1. sms. BASIS. paging devices. Note: ATP Server . Delloite. . They define the pain points of every business user owner and document them. Issue --. or with no company (Company Bankrupt/ Merger etc.The GUI should be compatible. Customer enquires in the market and calls for the Auditors to identify the software. . Example: .The software should support Mobile devices. . NW 4. The existing software is not capable to communicate with other systems 5. Too many legacy systems. 1. Bearing Point. password change. .Available to Promise -----> Ware House.

Business partner owners .GETSYSDEF . sapconsultant.com. TCS.Test Data Migration Server QAS PRE PROD SAND DEV/ CUST/ GOLDEN UNIT TESTING INTEGRATION PAYROLL/ TDMS TRAINING PRE PROD PROD 8 .These list will be submitted to Oracle Apps. WIPRO. . .Customer calls for quotation to implement SAP This is the first official document released to implement SAP.Support partners like IBM.Preparatory costs has to be borne by vendors TDMS . sapbasis. Note: Toughly Coupled/ Hardly . Peoplesoft.bck files while reinstalling the SAP Refer: sapfans. SAP is Strong in Manufacturing.Software Vendors. They can also raise questions in the form of RFI (Request for Information) 18-Aug-09 -----------------C:\pf\sapinst_instdir\ERP\system\ORA\central\AS Ensure that there should not be any .com.Customer decides software with the help of feasibility reports and assistance from auditors.124 These requirements list will be floated as RFQ feasibility of software. . Hyperion. Weak in Retail } Tcode-SFW5(Switch Framework) SA38 .com Auditor gather info from . NAVISION. MAHINDRA submits the proposal. Seibel (CRM) implementing partners.

Recovery etc. Financial Background and Share Value 5. Average man power experience going to be deployed 7. Project Implementation Methodology 2. Past Projects and experience in that area 6. Backup. TCS.Capability Maturity Model.125 RFQ . Sap Partnership) 10. Routing. WIPRO etc) . Process 3. Technical questions related to Hardware. Assumptions Based on the above proposal customer and audit team shortlist the two or three software vendors (IBM. Risk and mitigation --------------- 1. Module specific questions 2. Company Strengths 4. Challenges in the project.Implementation Partners and call them for Interview (technical discussions) to exhibit their capabilities. SIX SIGMA. Disaster.Request for Quotation (Released by customers) RFI . VPN. 9. Case studies and customer references 8. Download) etc. Certifications (CMMI . Desktops. 3. risks and mitigations 11. Based on 4th and 7th vendor will be finalized to implement SAP Note: External Security Routing Switching Proxy Firewall Internal Security . Implementation of solution manager (Provides Roadmap. Business Scenarios.Request for information -----------------It can contain as follows 1. Documentation (Upload. Access.

20%. We need to provide manpower to SAP to implement @ customer site. SAP Project bidder is SAP for 28 Crores in Singareni Collories .. 5. Cost of the Offshore Onsite Man hours/ Man Days/ Man Months 20-30$ 160-240$ 60-100$ 1000$ 20000$ 3. Let us say the Project Manager is SAP. RFQ and RFI (Customer and Vendor) 2. (Basis Consultant) Landscape Deployment Plan: . staff. Fixed Bid 2. sick etc). 4... LANDSCAPE DEPLOYMENT PLAN 1. SOW and Project Award (Customer and Vendor) 4.30%. Number of hours required/ No of Man days/ No of Man Months 2. Payment will be released in Parts ---. Project Costing: 1. Hardware requirements from customers are to be documented. Replacement.. @ Million Dollars for completion all inclusive (Fares. Holidays. Project can be a fixed bid let us say 2. Risks and mitigations has to be clearly stated in the SOW... 19-Aug-09 II.20%. Go-Live ..20% Realization . Landscape Deployment. accommodation. They out sourced to Seal Infotech for training and implementation. it is vendor responsibility..e.000 (i. Final Preparation . vacations. Eg. Activity Based (Try to include Wait time) The scope of work needs to be defined properly before sign-on.126 Authenticating Authorized users is Internal Security. Delay in Software.Project Start 10%. Time and Material (T&M) 3. RFP (Customer and Vendor) 3. Blue print .00.. Resource Based 4. If SOW is not defined properly. Critical Tasks are based on Man days/ Man Hours Example : Disaster Recovery 1..

But exact number of systems will be known only after the Hardware sizing 1 CPU / 2 Parallel Process By default 3 Parallel Process. CLUSTERING Standby server or do you need any suggestions. SAP Provides quick sizing toll (http://service. Address. Platform and communications 3. Vendor. DB. Email Id. Project Manager and Hardware vendors (IBM. Load On the System: Users work on the system on various modules MM . FI Transactions) High Availability options (Time of Availability) These are the general details that are required for sizing.Sales .com/sizing) Goto> Sizing tool > Click on Quick sizer It will be opened on new window Provide customer number. 1. Mirroring. Storage (Hard disks) and Memory. Material. Note: Legacy database size (get the details from customer what amount of data they are planning to migrate into SAP. RAID. HP. Supplier. Example Customer Database size is 400GB but they want to migrate 250GB into SAP (Customer. It is used to determine the CPU's. DELL). It may serve the customer as an overview of the SAP systems. OS. III. Provide Customer details to SAP (Name of the contact.sap.Logistics SD .127 It consists of the number of systems that are going to be deployed in the customer data center. Provide Project name and create a Project for sizing. SUN. FAX) 2. HARDWARE SIZING It is an exercise carried out by Basis consultant with the help of the customer business process owners.

Note: ---------------------------IBM .DB2 [AIX O/s .Financial 40% More to the sizing result. IBM P Series generates 800 SAP's/ CPU. RAID5 . Modules used 1.ALL Sap tables will be stored 65.128 FI .MAXDB Oracle SQL Server .JAVA -----------------------------21-Aug-09 Sizing is performed by quick sizer which is proprietary by quick sizer which is proprietary tool of SAP. 1.SAP Application Benchmark for Performance Standards) It is calculated in terms of Hardware vendors provide CPU in terms of the CPU's Eg. 1 Spare/ Parity) . I Series V5R4 .USR02.DB2 Database]. SAP's .Mirroring (1:1) on disk goes down other should take over. RAID1 . Sizing is based on the following. Type of Users 3.Database schema owner SAPSR3DB . X Series (I Series V5R4) is the O/s Clustering (Mechanism : PING PONG) DD02L . SAPSR3 .(5 Disks---.Microsoft P Series. mandt from SAPSR3. High Availability 1.DB2] SAP .611 SQL>Select bname.Util -4. High Availability 2. 2.

SAN . . If the existing server collapses -.. IBM P-Series Unless unlocked by IBM we cannot make use of the additional Hard Disks Note: For Upgrade . Product life cycle Management (Currently HR is not going to be implemented but.etc -. buy more leased lines from different vendors 7. Backup .More than one cable CPU's -.Multiple CPUS Memory .multicables -.129 3. If disaster occurs -----.. there is a plan to implement in future.UPS -. If the connectivity fails ..Generator Network Cable --.Setup DR Server in a different geographical location 6.Two Parallel systems (Used for failover or Load balancing) Eg.Storage Area Network 4.Hosted on Multiple slots DISK ..RAID and SAN 8.SAN 5.. Financials.due to power cable --. If it before three years consider HR in sizing if not. If the complete system collapses due to hardware failure use clustering -.Sizing Capacity .Sizing Module Selection: Select the modules that are going to be implemented like Logistics.

40 HRS * 60 Mins 1Dialogue Step .4800 Dialogue Steps .40 Hrs . Purchase Order / Week .30 Sec 3. Default Host .14400 . High Availability .Public .Business Configuration) Tcode: scpr20 > From End user system If any one stuck @ point executing a command SM59 > Help > Create Mssg. Execute 4.480 Dialogue Steps with the system .bsp .htmlb RT Click > Activate Service Note: This should be done as Post Installation Steps SPRO > SAP Solution Manager > General Configuration Activating BC Sets (BC. 480 .200 * 10 Dialogue Steps = 2000. 22-Aug-09 Service Desk > 1. User .SAP .TKT No: 008000000001 The Strategy is to migrate/ upgrade the hardware for every three years.40*60/480 = 5 Min = 300 Sec 2. Component BC-MID-RFC Test Low Test -.10 Secs Eg. SICF 3.130 1. The sizing is based on 1.Need to activate some services 2.SAP .40 Hrs . 480 .

. IV. No of users Along with legacy database and future growth of users User FI CO Low 50 50 Medium 250 250 High 250 250 The sizing is also called as T-Shirt sizing which determines your servers as (S. case studies. HP ships from Singapore. OS 2. Database 3. Email. L. Interfaces (Like Fax. past experience.131 2. consistency. storage and CPU in terms of Saps'. Customer calls the RFQ from various vendors to supply hardware. If the sizing output requires 3200 SAPS then we need 4 CPU's. .Based on companies stability. The Hardware resources are required for the following which needs to be considered while sizing 1.. XXL) Sizing output determines the memory. SMS. SAPS is ( SAP APPLICATION BENCHMARK FOR PERFORMANCE STANDARDS) SAPS are calculated based on Sales module.Hardware vendors take 3 weeks to 4 weeks to deliver based on the availability of the hardware. M. SAP assumes that a sales order/ Purchase order consumes around 8-12 Dialogue steps. Printers 5. (The hardware vendor determines the CPU Size based on SAPS example an ISeries machine single CPU generates 800 SAPS. price and support (warranty).) 4. XL. For every 2000 sales documents that are generated per hour requires 100 SAPS. reliability. HARDWARE ORDER 1. Modules and 3.. Philippines and Malaysia IBM ships from US V. ORDERING SAP SOFTWARE . Third party communication (Batch processing etc) So we can consider adding 30-50% to the sizing results. XS. Pager etc. CPU cannot be arrived directly because the process speed depends upon the hardware vendor.

000 Users.Points to the target system BIN contains default. BI. * Every year we need to run USMM and send the report to SAP. Etc Entry. Solution Manager.pfl SAP_BC_ADMIn S_Transports CTS_Admin Disp+exe ( PING.e.) SCM.000 we should have atleast 150-200 Users for 10+1 cost 18 Lakhs.000 depending upon number of users. License is a single user based.RAM . ERP. --------------------------Note: Heap Memory Physical Memory Virtual Memory .Sieble Each license cost 2000 USD Each Developer Cost 4000 USD After negotiation in Indian Market the Single user cost comes to 40.000 to 1.Oracle Apps MySAPSCM . MI etc. PI. i.Part of the Physical Memory (RAM Memory) .Part of the Memory from the Hard disk Buffer Bin . EP. If we buy MYSAP business suite then all comes under one license. We can buy 100 Users and used for 10.132 ISUSER (INDIAN SAP USER FORUM) ASUSER(AMERICAN SAP USER FORUM) Communicate with SAP vendor (Channel Partners) and purchase the license. If we buy one license we can access .00. For 40. SRM CRM are charged Separately. * There is no lock for licensed users in the system. SRM.Peoplesoft MySAPCRM . License Cost varies based on Geographical Location MySAPFI . Any Kernel upgrade has been done (DEV_DISP.log) --------------------------27-Aug-09 ...

.5B ...0...0.710).. Chemical.0....6..0 2..133 BASIS ...0 . 3...0 BW .3.0..6C 4..0. . .1C Owner of the Database .. Oil..0. ..ECC 5... SRM are SRM Versions XI .1I it is based on three tier and web services are provided by using ITS. C and D is kernel versions (Mining.4. ...0 CRM .. 3.. 3.....5 SCM . Textile..5A.) SAP determined to bring all the components on to a common platform and introduced SAP Web Application Server (WAS) The first version of WAS is 620 (A direct jump from 4. from WEBAS 620 to 640 It provides built in ITS to make application server as WEB Application Server. Utilities.SAP<SID> . Next Level of WAS is 640 ERP .. Upto BASIS 4. Insurance.....4.0 onwards and upto 3.. ERP Version is 4.0 is based on two tier which is built on Mainframes. EP .6D is the Kernel Version.4.. APO are SCM Versions 2.SAPSR3.6D) On 620 . Real Estates.0.SAPSR3 from WEBAS 700 It is a Netweaver (640. B.1 are BW Versions 2.7E On 620 .6 A. baking. .It provides runtime environment for SAP Applications. 700.. etc. 3.. 4. 4..4...BW version is 3..

BASIS only Non-Unicode From SAPWEBAS 640 unicode is introduced. AMD64. From 620 The database contains only 6 tablespaces(Physical Location) in 640 owner is SAP<SID> PSAP<SID> PSAP<SID>USR PSAP<SID>REL SYSTEM PSAPROLL(PSAPUNDO) PSAPTEMP SQL> Select tablespace_name from dba_tablespaces. Run directory is used to host executables of kernel upto 640 where as OS version (NTI386.Database Related PSAPUNDO .ECC6.0 . Install Central System Installation (Select Usage type during Installation) R/3 Setup is used to install SAP upto Versions Basis 4.0 .0 Install ABAP(CI. IA64) with UC/ NUC is available in version 700. DBI).BI7.5.0 . Owner is SAPSR3 for ABAP engine and SAPSR3DB is for JAVA Engine..PI7.0 .134 Next level of WAS is 700 ERP BW EP XI SRM CRM .6C SAPINST introduced in WEB Application Server 620-640.From Oracle Log for Administration . SYSTEM . Interactive SAPINST is to modify the inputs move front and back to review the inputs introduced in WAS700.[SAPR3] owner.0 .EP7.5. OLD: The database table spaces are 27 which ends with D(Data) and I(Index).For Roll Back SYSAUX . The database contains only 8 tablespaces in 700. JAVA add on.

[CDCLS] Cluster Table. Database Users (DDIC and SAP* are SAP Users resides in USR02 Table) SQL> select count(*) from DBA_USERS where owner = 'SAPSR3'.xxx Components: BASIS 65xxx BASIS+ERP 31-Aug-09 DATABASE It is a storage.Component Specific PSAPSR3700 . 17476 SQL> select count(*) from SAPSR3.Version Specific PSAPSR3USR .USER RELATED Info PSAPSR3DB .Temp Storage Memory PSAPSR3 . It is used to store the data in the hard disk. Eg. The difference is because of -19. 65611 SQL> select count(*) .JAVA Specific DB GUI Versions 46C 46D 620 640 700 710 Based on Windows and JAVA SQL> select username from DBA_USERS. owner from DBA_USERS group by owner.DD02L. .135 PSAPTEMP .

The backup management and reorganization is not available. restore and recovery .Database has its own structure to manage the data using the database specific binaries and libraries. reorganization. The version management will be difficult and time consuming to get the required/ identify the file. db2/bin.. The data does not follow the LUW concept and so it is not consistent and reliable.Duplication of data is avoided and uniqueness is obtained by using primary and secondary keys.Data search is faster by using indexes (based on Keys) Eg: As in windows we can create as many folders and subfolders with the same name and the search criteria depends on the search string. There are no indexes to search the data.. 5. 3. It consists of one or more transactions that are bundled together which can be committed as a group or rollback without any data loss. LUW .. Oracle/bin. test. 4.ppt.. test. . test.. db2/lib.Data is stored in terms of tables (Tables contain rows and columns).doc.Database provides tools for backup management. test. 2. . The data is not in the organized format.. Columns are headers and rows are the data. .rtf.txt.xls. test.pps Disadvantage of the file system 1. mssql/bin. .LOGIC UNIT OF WORK. mssql/lib.pdf. test. C:\shawn\shawn\shawn.136 We can also store the data in terms of file system like test. Database: Used to store the data in the organized format and it has to follow RDBMS rules (Relational Database Management System) . reliability and transaction LUW. These are the reasons for the evolution of DB. . Oracle/lib.Databases follow RDBMS rules to achieve consistency.

Update) 6. INSERT. the request is converted into Native SQL statements of the respective database. 9. if the field and table exists. R/3 Work process handles the user request by interpreting the screen elements. Request is handled by dispatcher 3. UPDATE. 5. GI (Goods Issued) AP (Account Payables). DENORMALIZATION Process of grouping smaller tables into larger tables for having data comprehensively available for analysis and reporting BIW. R/3 Work process keeps a copy in the R/3 Buffer and response is sent to user.Purchase Order . DELETE] Scenario User requests for weekly status report. The data is fetched into Database buffers before the response is sent to R/3 work process. If the request is not accessed earlier. Based on the available processes requests are served based on FIFO. MODIFY. ERP(ECC6). User submits the request. AR (Account Receivables) . if table exists then checks for the fields. 11.FI Dept (Approval) . GR(Goods Receipt). The response is fetched from buffers if they are accessed earlier 7. R/3 Work process communicates with database process to get the response. SRM. Databases are normalized. Sales Order.. 8.137 RFQ(Approved) . NORMALIZATION Process of splitting up the larger tables into smaller tables using primary keys and secondary keys. Database work process checks whether the table exists.Data is normalized and denormalised according to the requirements of the customer. Delete.Tenders (Contractors) (Eg: Purchase Order. [SELECT. .Sales Order Purchase Req . 2. 1. then asks for the optimized path to go to the database table and identify the relevant rows based on keys/ Indexes (Five 5 Seconday Indexes) 10. Invoice. Modify.. Keeps the request in Queue 4. program logic (Insert.

138 01-Sep-09 UPDATE COMMAND 1. User gets the response that the record is updated. Eg. 7. The update request goes to the database.4 Mb. 14. 10. Oracle is provided by Oracle Corporation which owns (PeopleSoft. User request for updating a purchase order/ quotation / Invoice 2. . All the update requests goes to the database and lock the record in the database so that no user update it.Cigarette Paper . Database process handles the request and checks whether table. JDEdwards. 12. table definitions and execution (Cost based optimizer) path are valid. and other small software's to compete with SAP. ORACLE Oracle is a database that is used by 2/3rd of SAP Customers. Gets the record to database buffer for modification (No record is modified in the database directly) 11. Dispatcher keeps the request in queue based on FIFO 4. 6. Seibel. Redo logs are duplexed (Mirror logs and Orig Logs) and ensure that the data is updated in the database. In order to support SAP Customers it is mandatory to know the database management. Consider a pan shop Customer . 8.Accounts book Log buffers are a small area around 1Mb . The committed data is updated into database 13. Note: Committed data can be updated or Redo. As the database buffers need to be accessed by user modifications are not performed in DB Buffers instead in log buffers. Database process keeps a copy of the record in roll back segment PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO table space to roll back in case of CRASH/ System Failure. In the process of updating it will communicate with enqueue and obtain the lock on the document so that no other user updates it. The request is received by the dispatcher 3. R/3 Work process handles the request and update the document into temporary tables (cannot update the permanent tables because all the LUW's in the transaction has to be completed) 5. As the log buffer is small the content is moved in to Redo logs periodically. 9. The locks are released and rollback gets invalidated.

2. 9.0.7 9.1.2. 10. well spoken among customers.6.SAPDB (MAXDB) is the cheapest combination.0.4.0 9.2.6C 4.0.2. Versions Oracle has versions of database SAP License is costlier on Oracle than any other combinations. consistent. DB2 from IBM and SAPDB(MAXDB) from SAP shares the remaining 1/3rd of SAP Customers. reliable.0. Microsoft SQL Server from Microsoft.2.7 and ECC5. strong. 9.0.0 8. .4 Linux . SAP R/3 R/3 ECC6.2.2.139 Oracle is a proven. robust database to handle any amount of data in Terra bytes.7 10.

140 DATABASE ARCHITECHTURE Connection Mechanism (refer dev_<SID>.old) 1. 2. DB_Connect to connect to database using client version 3. . Users OPS$ User to connect to database and get the password of the SAPSR3 User. R/3 Work process loads all the DB Libraries.

SAPSR3 is the Schema/ DB Owner for SAP Database. DB Shadow process checks the task contains valid table and field definitions. SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = 'OPS$WILLSYS99\NWDADM'. WP task handler interpret the user request. R/3 Work process handovers the task to database shadow process (1:1 Ratio between R3WP: DBWP) 9. Communicate with Oracle Client to communicate with DB in native language. 2. 6. 5. DB Shadow checks if any SQL Execution plan exists. Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue 4.141 OPS$ Mechanism It is a mechanism which is used by operating system users to connect to the database without any password. As the processes are able to access the complete database related to schema owner. WP ------> SAPUSER (Table) USERID | PWD OPS$-User | XXX Relogin with the above user and password Disconnect from the DB and reconnect using SAPSR3 userid and password to get complete access. . 7. User uses SAP GUI to perform a transaction. Based on available resources a process is allocated to user requests based on FIFO. SAP restricts the access by using internal security. USER Request Flow/ Display 1. 11. 8. 10. 12. 3. OPS$<SID>ADM is the user who owns the table SAPUSER and contains the SCHEMA OWNER SAPSR3 user and password. If not it builds the plan based on cost based optimizer and update SQL Cache. DB Shadow checks if the requested content exist in DB Buffer if not fetch the content from database and updates DB Buffer. IF the table/ Field definition does not exists gets a copy from the database and update the DB Cache/ LIB Cache. 13. Check the content is available in R/3 buffers. All the work processes uses OPS$<SID>ADM to connect to the database without any password. The response is handover to R/3 Work Process. User request is handled by the dispatcher. R/3 Work process checks if it is eligible for buffering then keeps a copy in R/3 buffers.

142 14.. Every request that needs modification/ update / delete has to be performed only in this area. ORACLE PROCESSES 1.Physical Reads/ Logical Reads] * 100 i. It is defined by a parameter db_block_buffers. Shadow Process . It takes time to build SGA when system is started that is why the system is slow after a restart. bytes/1024/1034 "MB" from V$sgastat where pool. SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA: It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped. Authorizations. It should not be too big or too small. From ST04 . SQL> show SGA LOG BUFFER: It is used to perform the data manipulations by database work process. SQL> select name. Table and Field definitions and packages. DB Buffer is used to store the data until its size is full (or) the content gets invalidated by a change or least recently used. It is defined by the parameter log_buffer generally its size varies between 1MB to 4MB. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost. Out of 100 request 6 requests goes to the database. In general for an optimized database the ratio should be not less than 94%.. Each query/ request should pass through this area. Response is sent to the user. Refer init<SID>.ora file SYSTEM GLOBAL AREA is the sum of Shared pool. Its quality is measured by database buffer hit ratio.e. It is used to reduce the hits on the database there by reducing the load on the database. DB buffers and log buffers SHARED POOL It is defined by shared_pool_size which is a part of SGA (System Global Area) It contains DBCACHE and LIBCACHE and they are nothing but parsed SQL Statements. Its size is defined by multiplying by 8kb because each block size is 8 kb. DB BUFFER : Used to store the content that is accessed from the database..[Logical Reads ...

when RedologA is full it is closed for writing and RedologB is opened for writing. They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP. These are initiated by system based on requirement. These are also called as User processes (In Oracle Terms) The process are established at the rate of 1:1 during the startup of SAP system.e. Log writer writes the commit into Redo log files but when the size of Redo log file is full size 50MB. BACKGROUND/ SERVER PROCESS These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. When the data is committed System Change Number is generated to ensure the faster commit mechanism. Origlog B. LOGWRITE (LGWR) is used to write the committed data into Redo log files (Origlog A. . e) A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification f) the data/ record is modified in log buffer. Mirrorlog A. This cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small. b) Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database c) It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original state if the update is cancelled or abrupt. d) The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are not lost.143 2. They called as shadow processes because they perform the task non-interactively. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Both resides on two different physical disks). B) from log buffer. Background Process/ Server Process SHADOW PROCESS These are used to handle the user requests. LOG WRITER Mechanism a) R/3 work process submits the request for an update. LOG SWITCH It is a process of switching between RedologA to RedologB and Mirror Logs A to B i. It will perform Log Switch.

144 There will be only one process. 4. The log writer process writes data from the redo log buffers to the redo log files on the disk. Background or Server Processes These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. They are called as Shadow Processes because they perform the task non-interactively. When a transaction is committed 2. ORACLE PROCESSESS 1. i. The writer is activated under the following conditions 1. LOG WRITER . They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP.e. The DB WP waits till the buffer total memory gets utilized and then updates the DB) SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped. It takes time to build SGA when system is started that is why the system is slow after a restart. These are initiated by system based on the requirement. Every 3 Seconds 3. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost. The log writer must always be running for an instance. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk. These are called as User Processes (In Oracle Terms). When the redo log buffer is 1/3rd full or 1MB of committed. Shadow Processes 2. Background/ Server Process Shadow Processes These are used to handle the user requests. 02-Sep-09 (Note: If the buffer size is more no updates will happen. 1.

2. R/3 Work process submits request for an update. 4. When the redolog buffer is 1/3 full or 1MB of committed. When Redolog A is full it is closed for writing and Redolog B is opened for writing. 5. LOG SWITCH It is a process of switching between Redolog A to Redolog B and Mirror Logs A and B i. 4. The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. MirrorlogA.e. * Log Writer is used to write the committed data into Redolog files (OriglogA. When a transaction is committed 2. OriglogB. It will perform log switch. There will be only one process. This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are not lost. The Log writer process writes data from the redolog buffers to the redolog files on the disk. Every 3 Seconds 3.145 Mechanism 1. It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original if the update is cancelled or abrupt. B) from log buffer. The Writer is activated under the following conditions 1. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk The log writer must always be running for an instance. 03-Sep-09 . When the data is committed SYS Change number is generated to ensure the faster commit mechanism log writer (LGWR) writes the commits in to Redolog files but when the Redolog file is full) size 50MB. Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database 3. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Both resides on two different physical disks). The data/ record is modified in Log Buffer This cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small. A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification 6.

MirrorlogA. When log buffer cannot write the content then log buffer gets filled and subsequently the update mechanism gets halted. All the updates will be done from Logbuffers. CKPT . 2. MirrorlogB . A copy is made to LOG Buffer for updation. so. When ever a check point occurs (It writes based on system change number SCN) Note: Every select statement hits the database and brings the data to DB Buffers. The contents of OriglogA will be written to ORAARCH directory (Provided archieve_log_mode is set to true). 1. SQL> select sequence # from V$ARCHIVED_LOG. OriglogB. (Redolog files) gets filled and need to move to other location. If it is not moved.146 The Content of OriglogA. When Redologs are full ARCH Process During the log switch OriglogA gets filled for writing and OriglogB is opened for writing. the redo log files needs to write to an alternative location immediately once they get filled. DBWR is triggered in the following circumstances [ORACLE RAM] = SGA 1.. Similarly RedologB. When the request comes to access the dirty buffer content. DBWR (Database Writer) The content that needs to be updated is fetched into DB Buffer for selection. Once the content is updated in Log Buffer it marks the content in Database Buffer as Dirty buffers and not eligible for selection.Check Point . The contents are written by ARCH from RedologA to ORAARCH and RedologA is ready to be written by LOGWR.. Redolog files gets filled and does not have space to write the content from log buffer.

DBF) The location is specified by a parameter control_file. . Datafiles : These files are with extension (. It triggers during the system startup and ensure that system is started. the system modifies by itself when ever there are any changes. These are used to store the data in the Oracle specific RDBMS format. PMON is responsible for cleaning up the database buffer cache and freeing resources that the user process is using and release the locks.Used to start the processes if they are stopped . In case of system crash/ abnormal termination SMON reads the online redologs and redo the changes to database and also reads the PSAPUNDO to roll back the changes. PHYSICAL FILE SYSTEM 1. 2.ora is used to provide the startup parameters for Oracle. It triggers DBWR/ LGWR SMON SYSTEM MONITOR Used to ensure the Oracle database is consistent and reliable. It is the most important file (Cntrl<SID>.920/a96524/C09procs. Do not modify the control file manually.com/docs/cd/310501_01/server.147 It is used to ensure that system is consistent.htm#21919 It updates the headers of all datafiles to record the details of the checkpoint. The system monitor process (SMON) performs recovery. PMON PROCESS MONITOR Used to monitor the process recovery when a user process (Shadow process) fails.Used to monitor the process (PMON) . if necessary at instance startup.oracle.Release locks . Initialization Files: init<sid>.dbf).Freeing the resources that were used by user processes. PMON periodically checks the status of dispatcher and server processes and restarts any that have stopped. . 3. download. Control Files: These are used to display the structure of the database into Six different locations.

. brarchive. Tnsnames.ora .148 init<sid>. Startup Nomount : This phase is used to create control files and database. a) Change the archive log mode status 3. brconnect. These are located in Oracle_home/ database(windows) DBS on UNIX.sap us used to provide the database backup/ restore (brbackup. 2. Commands Startup open Startup mount Startup no mount.. 4. 04-Sep-09 Special Parameterization files (SPFILE) All the changes that are made requires a reboot of Oracle database. Oracle contains 3 Modes (4 Including Restrict) 1. Startup Restrict: ..dba is used to provide authorization to SAPDBA/ BRTOOLS. Init<sid>. We need to explicitly create SP file this SP File cannot be edited manually E:\ORACLE\QAS\I02\ADMIN Oracle Startup When Oracle is started the database available for users.. allowing us to perform specific maintenance operation. In order to change certain parameters SPFILE is maintained.ora Provide port and the host name Sqlnet. brrestore) control parameters. Network/ Admin Listener. No datafiles are mounted.ora Provide Port and the Host Name. Startup Mount: We can start a DB and mount a database without opening it.

It reads the init parameters in the following sequence. 2. all the committed data is updated . restricted to the above operations. No new connections are allowed. SMON ensures that the database is consistent (REDO/ UNDO) All the users who are working on the system gets terminated abruptly and the intermediate data is lost. Shutdown Immediate The database is shutdown immediately but all the committed transaction are updated in the database and opened transactions are rolled back. Consistent. Shutdown Immediate 05-Sep-09 Shutdown Modes 1.ORA 2) SPFILE.e. End uses cannot perform any tasks. Shutdown Abort The database is forcibly shuts down and may not be consistent and requires recovery during startup.ORA Oracle Shutdown 1. 4.ORA 4) INIT. 1) SPFILE<SID>. (Which is committed) Not Consistent. 3. Startup Open: When DB is started using startup cmd. Shutdown Transactional. b) Perform a data load (With SQL * Loader) c) Temporarily prevent typical users from using data d) During certain migration and upgrade operations e) Used during patch applications the database is opened but not allowed i.ORA 3) INIT<SID>.149 a) Perform an export or import of database data. The database does not allow any new connections.

.. Next Extents 4. Minimum Extents 3. The data is stored in terms of Database block size in terms of Datablocks. Consistent 4...Utilizing the fragmented space. EXTENTS These are used to allocate space to a table/ segment to control the growth 1. .150 In the database and opened transactions are only allowed to complete. Shutdown Normal It allows the users to complete all the transactions and shut down the database. No new connections are allowed but time consuming to stop the database. Max Extents Segment means (table or Index) Group the blocks to Extent Reorganizing .. Eg: Req: 150 Given 200 Next 50 Max 500 These table/ Indexes are grouped logically into a tablespace/ Container .... STORAGE The database uses file system but organized in the RDBMS concept..ora) The two parameters DB_NAME and DB_BLOCK_SIZE should never be modified. Initial Extents 2. no new transactions are allowed.. Each block size is 8KB(8192 Bytes) Block size is determined by parameter DB_BLOCK_SIZE (refer inti<sid>. Data files are physical files on the file system where data is stored in Datablocks..

151 Tablespace is a logical entity which contains related tables/indexes. SYSAUX PSAPDEV PSAPDEV640/ 700 PSAPDEVUSR Temporary Table Space UNDO Table Space SYSAUX is a new tablespace available from version 10g. PSAP<SCHEMAID> 2. User encountered an error ORA-1653/ ORA-1654 tablespace over flown and the user could not update/ create any more PO's The user could not update the data because the datafiles are filled (or) there is no enough space to allocate for extents. Tablespace is pointed to physical datafiles. Eg: Users are creating purchase orders extensively into the tables EKPO. Resolution . PSAP<SID>RELEASE 3. Note: Each datafile is assigned to only one tablespace. Oracle provides default tablespace "SYSTEM to manage the database". These tables are assigned to a tablespace PSAP<SID>. This tablespace is pointing to two datafiles of size 4GB each. PSAPTEMP 5. SAP provides the other tablespaces that starts with naming convention PSAP 1. EKKO and other child tables. PSAP<SID>USR 4. Each Tablespace can have one or more datafiles to store the table data/ Index data. PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO 6.

CAP is Max. SAP recommends to migrate all the dictionary managed tablespaces to locally managed before 10g upgrade (Oracle).e. It collase the space that is left in all the extents before allocating an extent. 06-Sep-09 SQL> select * from dba_tablespace. Select * from dba_users. Locally Managed Table Spaces Default table spaces from 10g which manage the extents locally instead of dictionary management. SAP Tables are stored in DD02L Users are used to login to the database with various privileges. Users encounters an error ORA-1631 and ORA-1632 Max Extents Reached.152 Use BRTOOLS (Backup Recovery Tool) to resize the datafile (or) add a datafile. Use BRTOOLS or SE14 to increase the Extents. It requires database Reorganization. Select * from dba_tables where table_name like dba%. DMTS . (Alternatively we can add using SQL Command) SQL> Alter tablespace (Tablespace Name/ PSAP<SID>) add datafile location and size. Next. EXTENT MANAGEMENT When a table or Index is created they are assigned with Min Extent. Max along with the Percentage of Increase. Init.Dictionary Managed Tablespaces When ever a table is growing it increase it extents i. but there is a tablespace. Select * from dba_users. The free space in the existing extents is not used there by Fragmentation. It reduces the fragmentation there by reorganization is not required.. it uses next extents. Similarly PSAPROLL should be migrated to PSAPUNDO before upgrade. . Select username from dba_users.

For Eg. recovery. Size in GB 1 200 2 210 3 220 4 230 5 230 6 230 7 250 8 280 9 300 10 350 Conclusion The database is growing at an average of 15GB per/ day. Have a storage of 1 TB = 1024 GB At the current growth rate of the database can use the storage up to 30 days approximately. Monitor the size of the database to have a detailed capacity planning. We need to check the abnormal growth of the database.log which resides in SAPTRACE directory. System SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Administrative user but cannot be used to create modify the DB Perform backup. restore etc. 1. If we consider 2 Months duration the graph will be like this .The complete or absolute owner of oracle database server to perform the activities. DATABASE MONITORING As a part of the routine SAP basis checks the following database tasks can also included. Login to SAP system and log the database growth on daily basis.153 ops$willsys99\saservicesr3 ops$willsys99\saservice<SID> ops$willsys99\<sid>adm sys . Inform the inventory department to order more disks if there is really a DB growth. It is the only log which can gives us the complete history of database activities. Note: Oracle writes all startup logs into alrt<SID>.

segment_space_management from dba_tablespace. Option 7 for additional space function.1 (For which tablespace we need to increase the size of datafile) PSAPSR3700 . Enter choice . block_size from dba_tablespace.Tablespace Particular (DBA Planning Calendar) DB12 . critical objects based on Table spaces. Segment is nothing but a table or index. System 8192 ----SQL> select tablespace_name.Overview for a Database Identify the tablespaces which are grown more than 90% and add datafiles.command BRTOOLS Type option 2 for Space management. BRTOOLS BACKUP RESTORE RECOVERY TOOL These tools are provided by SAP for Oracle Database.Login as SIDADM on windows or ORASID on UNIX .Press Enter E:\oracle\SID\sapdata3\sr3700_16 . . Option 1 show tablespaces Continue 3 times to display the list of table spaces and their growth.154 DB02 is used to monitor the disk space. DB13 . Tables and Indexes Monitor SQL> Select tablespace_name.

we need to check if there are any missing indexes and recreate them if required in DB02/SE . blocksize from dba_tablespaces. Physical Reads: The number of reads that are made to Physical Database.It is calculated based on reads Logical Reads : The number of reads that are made to Database buffer.Add the datafile or resize datafile before its gets an error message "Tablespace overflow" MISSING INDEXES Identify the missing indexes in DB02 (which will reduce the performance without proper indexes) Goto DB02 > Diagnostics > Missing Tables and Index Check the objects that are missing . 2.For each table we can create 1 Primary Index and 4 Secondary Indexes these are predefined because of the huge table growth indexes are missed.155 In this path 16 datafiles are there if we increase the tablespace size one more data file is created called sr3700_17 SQL> select tablespace_name. Select the database buffer hit ratio.SAP Provides all the indexes (Predefined one(Primary Index) + Four (Secondary Index). . select them and create in the database. .The buffer hit ratio should not be less than 94% . Hit Ratio = ((Logical Reads .Objects which are missing are displayed in Red.Recreate them .Physical Reads)/ Logical Reads) * 100 . transaction ST04 .

DB backup is performed successfully or not 2. If the ratio is reduced we can conclude that DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS size is not sufficient or there are frequent updates on the system.f check . Archive directory is having space 4. BRCONNECT It is used to connect to the database and performs various administrative tasks. DB13 We need to check 1.. BRTOOLS contains the following Options 1. Offline to Oraarch are scheduled periodically and running fine.sap ---------..156 Physical reads are increasing conclude that the database hits are more. it is used to check the database and writes the logs into sapcheck directory. Update stats. Check conditions are described in transaction DB17 which in turn stores the details in DBMSGORA Open Command Prompt > brconnect -f check . DB Housekeeping Jobs are running successfully or not (DB Check. BRCONNECT . adapt extents) 3.sap It resides in Oracle_Home\database (Windows) In UNIX DBS directory It controls the runtime behavior of BRTOOLS. BRTOOLS reads the parameters from init<SID>. SCHEDULE DB BACKUP Init<SID>. clear old log files.Open it Change the parameter values Backup_type = disk 07-Sep-09 BRTOOLS These tools are used to manage or monitor the oracle database which are specifically provided by SAP.

Optimizer is used to collect the statistics for the tables whose statistics are outdated. Offline Backup (Cold Backup) The database is down during backup and no transaction is allowed as it is down. So that all the tables and Indexes where there are stored will be known to DB Optimizer. Partial Backup 1. Online Backup 3. BR-BACKUP BR Backup is used to take backup of the database (Datafiles). Whole Offline Backup: The backup taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the incremental backup. Incremental Backup 4. It is consistent and reliable.e.157 > brconnect -u system -p <pwd> -f check brconnect -f stats Used to run the database statistics. It is updated periodically (Weekly). Running update statistics improves the performance of the system. It identifies the tables whose statistics are outdated and updates them. How ever when these jobs are scheduled BRCONNECT runs in the background. We need to run the DB optimizer once a week. Offline Backup 2. Friend comes to India from America after 5 years) Cleaning up OLD log files brconnect -f cleanup It is used to clean the old log files from saptrace and sapcheck directory brconnect -f next It is used to adopt the next extents (i. There are various types of backups 1. When ever a backup is triggered BR Backup is initialized. Next extents can be increased automatically) These jobs can be scheduled using DBCALENDER (DB13). (Eg. .

Full Online Backup: It is complete database backup with out any catalogs. BR ARCHIVE (initSID. 4. It can be online or offline. Whole Online Backup: The backup is taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the online incremental backup. Catalog (SUNDAY . Partial Backup It is taken for a specific table during a patch (Especially HR Patches) Backup type is defined by a parameter Backup_mode = all Backup_type = offline Backup_dev_type = Tape or Disk Backup_root_dir = H:\oracle\SID\sapbackup All the above backups are performed by using brbackup.158 Eg: A database is of 2000 GB Which is not possible to take a daily full offline backup with a backup speed of 150GB/ Hour. Online Backup The DB is up and running with out effecting the user transactions. It is consistent and reliable with redo logs that are generating during backup.sap) .The rest will be taken) 2. Incremental Backup It is initiated from level0 backup and used when the database size is too big. Full Offline Backup: It is a complete database backup without any Catalog. Online Backup: It is consistent always with redo logs. 3.

Log writer writes to OrigLogA and OrigLog B. . . Archive_function = SAVE/ COPY/ DELETE Archive_copy_dir = H:\Oracle\NWD Tape_size= 100G Volume_archive=NWDA01. from ORAARCH directory to tape or disk.Log writer logs into OriglogA.So the Oraarch content needs to be moved to alternative location on hourly...While copying Oracle provides various means of log save because we don't want the corruption of logs..Archive function means the saving mechanism of log files. Mirror Log A... Mirror Log B. . . MirrorLogB -When online redo logs are full then Arch writes contents to Oraarch i. OriglogB..If Oraarch is full the archive gets stuck and the complete update mechanism stuck and users encounter congestion.159 It is used to backup the offline redolog file to tape or disk i. bi-hourly for every 4 hours or daily depending upon the frequency of updates.. .e (Offline redologs) the content of oraarch is referred as offline redo logs. . Reads content from Log Buffer.e. When OrigLog A is full it is moved to OrigLog B When OraArch is full it is backed up to a tape or disk. NWDA30. MirrorLogA.

Max datafiles are 250 in SAP. Indexes Export and Import tables) . SYSTEM COPY/ HOMOGENEOUS COPY/ HETEROGENEOUS COPY.Database standard house keeping jobs (DBStatistics. cleanup logs. change schema password etc. dbcheck..Database backup . Rebuild. 08-Sep-09 BRTOOLS It uses BRConnect. We can do the following with BRTools. . ..Extend the tablespace by adding datafile or resizing datafile.Redolog Backup . DB REFRESH 1. BRBackup.Start and stop the database . System Copy/ Homogeneous Copy . mostly create and drop are not used) .Restore Database .Display profiles.160 The data transfer from Oraarch to disk is done by BRArchive. adapt next extents) . BRRecover with various options.Tablespace management (Create drop alter. Each datafile size is 1% of the Whole database (100-200) 2 GB 200-400 4GB. BRRestore.from database backup .Recover Database from Redolog Backup .Reorganisation (Create.

specify typical . Database and R3 without changing OS or DB. 3. While applying patches. To change the hardware.specify the password if <sid>adm . DB Refresh It is the process of refreshing the data of one system (OS. R3) remains the same but only database is refreshed. STEPS for SYSTEM COPY 1. Heterogeneous Copy When ever there is a change in OS or DB then it is said to be heterogeneous. To move out from one OS to another or One DB to another DB which is called as OS/ DB Migration which needs to be carried under the guidance of Certified consultant. Source System 2. To setup a new system in the landscape (Only DEV and PRD exists. Kernel Upgrade to test the objects with Production data. i.161 It is used to setup a system similar to a PRD. now we need to deploy QAS as a copy of PRD) 2. DATABASE REFRESH by another system data. the system is completely build from OS. DB.specify Profile directory e:\usr\sap\sid\sys\profile . 5. 4.Specify the export location for Import.select database instance export . THE REASONS FOR SYSTEM COPY Unicode Migration or Code Page Conversion 1. QAS etc. Review the inputs and continue the import.System Copy . 2. Use Installation Master DVD . .Source System .Use Additional Tasks .e. System Copy is performed using export and import of the database. 3.

The objects which are developed in DEV needs to be transported to QAS and PRD the objects behave differently in DEV.162 Let us say there are three systems DEV. Create Control file with new database structure of QAS 5. QAS and PRD. So we need to copy the PRD (DATA files) system to QAS system from time to time to get proper quality done. Generate the control file from source system. A Small report which fetches monthly sales executes 1 Sec in DEV and in QAS where as in PRD it is consuming 30Min. Eg. It is required to keep the dependencies of the target system to restore them later i. QAS and PRD existing in the landscape. add-ons in the landscape. Restore the database from Tape or Disk. 4. We don't want any issues that crops up on the production system. Eg. The report is good in DEV and QAS but bad in PRD that means quality checks are failed. Start the system and restore the target dependencies Pre-Steps for DB Refresh 1.Copy the cofiles & datafiles in usr\sap\sid\trans . Se we need to delete the source dependencies and restore the target dependencies. POST STEPS Pre steps Pre Steps on the Target system. Make the BTC Processes to 0. Process 1. Take a copy of them using transport requests. Similarly we need to apply patches. 2. screen shots etc. RFCDES and TBDLS And then we need to release the Transport of Copies. Users. . USR02. Roles etc. Kernel . after refresh. After Refresh the target system QAS behaves like production System. 3. So we will take a copy in QAS and apply before PRD. DB REFRESH 3. RFC Connections.e. PRD DB Size 1TB 2TB. License. Delete the entire SAPDATA files. so that no background job is triggered 6. Batch Jobs. 1. Create the transport of copies by using SE01 and specify the following objects/ tables USR01. PRE STEPS 2. Printers.

163 - Take the screen shots of SM59, BD54, DB13, SM37, AL11(All the SAP Directories), WE20 (IDOCS), SMLG, RZ12 (RFC SERVER GROUPS), RZ70 (Inorder to populate the backend system details to SLD), RZ04 (Operation Modes) SCC4, SPAM. 4. And then We need to delete all the datafiles related to QAS system. data1, data2 etc. First we need to stop the oracle services the structure should remain same. Directories like sapdata1.... sapdata..n, MirrorlogA, B, OriglogA, B 5. First Activity After taking the backup of PRD server we need to generate control file. > Alter database backup controlfile to Trace. It will generate the Cntrl File under usertrace directory. Copy the cntrl file to quality system and rename it as with .sql extension. If it is offline backup the foldernames offline b.afd online b.afd

08-Sep-09 BRTOOLS ERRORS 1. Tablespace over flow (ORA-1653, 1654) 2. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631, 1632) 3. Archive Stuck (ORA-255, ORA-272) 4. Datablock corruption (ORA-1578)... restore from old backup 5. Missing end backup while performing a backup 6. stats out dated - run brconnect -f stats 7. Oracle listener, Tnsnames port issues 8. Oracle DLL Compatibility issues (Patch Oracle) 9. International hardware errors ORA-600 (Refer to SAP and Oracle) 10. OPS$ issues related to authentication while logging 11. Connection issues between R/3 WP: Oracle Shadow with error ORA-12560 12. Oracle is corrupted or Disk corrupted, External disk not available, datafile missing, Space issues. 13. Missing Indexes in DB02 14. Database backup not successful due to space issues, tape issues 15. Control file missing - Recreate control file Note: All Oracle errors refer to Oracle/ SAP (ORA-XXXX) 16. Oracle shared memory not available issue with SGA 17. If buffer hit ration below 94% (Increase block buffer size)

164 09-Sep-09 IMPLEMENTATION Installation of SAP System 1. Download the Installation Guide from the Market Place. www.service.sap.com/instguide 2. No of users/ Load on the system 3. Perform Sizing www.service.sap.com/sizing

4. Download the software www.service.sap.com/swdc 32 Bit means I386 cmd> memsize/ memlimit 5. Entry in etc\services PORTS Dispatcher Port Message server Port Gateway Port Secured Dispatcher Port Secured Gateway : : : : : 3200 3600 3300 4700 4800 to to to to to 3299 3699 3399 4799 4899

6. Make sure that Installation Ports 21212, 21213 are not used 7. Kernel depends on O/S 32-64, Database, UC/ NUC Exports are OS/ DB Dependent 8. All the entries are stored in control.xml and installation progress is stored in keydb.xml If the installation is aborted/ cancelled then the above two files will help us to start from the point where it stopped earlier. 9. An installation directory sapinst_dir is created which host the log files of the installation Note: SMSY > System Landscape > Other object > create sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706


10-Sep-09 TADIR - Stores all the repository objects

Repository consists of your ABAP objects like programs, function modules. ABAP data dictionary consists of tables, domains etc. Data dictionary is like a part of repository only. From SE11 these are database objects Database tables views datatype Lock objects Searchhelp. Type group Domain. Note: Instance No 00: Port No: 3200 Database O/S R/3 sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706



166 1. No Solman Key 2. Pre requisite checker 3. Passwords are default and OS/SB passwords need to be provided in the input screen 4. Central instance and database are installed separately (Central system is introduced with combination of CI and DBI) --------------------------------------NTI386 - Intel Pentium IA64 - Intel Itanium X64 - AMD64 AIX_64- IBM --------------------------------------5. Kernel used to reside in RUN directory and in current versions in sys\exe\UC\NT\I386 6. No screen to review the inputs and change them if required. 7. No interactive / colorful screens 8. Up to 4.6C r3setup is used to install SAP. sapinst is introduced from 4.7 version. 9. Tablespaces are 27 up to 4.6c from 4.7e onwards they are reduced to 6 Tablespaces. 10. SAPDBA is replaced by BRTOOLS in newer versions 11. MMC passwords are required to start SAP in newer versions cmd> startsap name=DEV nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=HOME ---------------------------------------------------------OS = SIDADM SAPSERVICE<SID> ST06 - gets for SAPOSCOLL service Trans - EPS (Electronic Parcel Service) - All the developments are hosted. ---------------------------------------------------------PROFILE MANAGEMENT Usr\sap\SID\sys\profile There are three 3 profiles which are available by default 1. Default 2. start_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.pfl 3. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.pfl Installation Questions 1. Installation Pre-Requisites

167 2. Installation Inputs 3. Difference between earlier and Current Versions 4. Installation Checks 5. Starting of SAP System.

Installation Pre-Requisites 1. Download the Installation Guide www.service.sap.com/Instguide 2. Sizing 3. Download the Software from www.service.sap.com/swdc 4. Install JAVA j2sdk_1_4_2_12 5. Set the Environment Variables JAVA_HOME PATH 6. Set the Virtual Memory 7. Install ORACEL 10g Execute OUI.exe (Oracle Universal Installer) (.) Install Database Software Only 8. Install Patch Installation Inputs Sapinst.exe from InstMaster Folder SAP Netweaver 2004s Support Release2 > SAP Systems > Oracle > Central System Administration Select (.) Typical Prompts to logoff to get some privileges Login as Administrator Select the Usage Types AS ABAP AS JAVA BI JAVA DI EPCORE EP MI OUI.exe

168 PI Browse for Java Components Browse for JCE Policy (JAVA Cryptographic Encryption) Prompts for SID and the Installation Drive [E:] Prompts for Master Password Prompts for DBSID and Database Host Prompts for Installation Exports path (Actual Content lies in Exports) Exports varies from Component to Component Prompts for Kernel and Oracle Client paths System Landscape Directory (.) Configure Local SLD IF Local SLD then Object Server Name [Hostname] Parameter Summary If required change the MirrorLogA and OrigLogA, B to different directories Requires SOLMAN Key from Solman System [SMSY] Task Progress.....~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Install SAPGUI (Setupall.exe)

Installation Checks 1. Users: Two users are created <SID>ADM SAPSERVICE<SID>

<SID>ADM is used to start the SAP system and Administration of SAP SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service user used to run the services. Verify from My Comp> Manage > Users and Groups

169 SAPOSCOL is an operating system collector ensure that sufficient resources are available to start SAP system. SAP<SID>_INSTANCENO used to start the SAP system.

2. Groups: Following groups are created to work on Oracle Database and R/3 Executables. ORA_<SID>_DBA ORA_<SID>_OPER SAP_<SID>_GLOBALADMIN SAP_<SID>_LOCALADMIN SAP_LOCALADMIN 3. usr\sap\trans is created to host the transports. It is a common transport directory where the changes of development are stored as transport requests, provides EPS\in for patching the system. 4. Kernel executables are extracted into usr\sap\SID\sys\exe directory Used to start and manage the runtime of the SAP System. 5. Profiles are created in usr\sap\SID\sys\profiles Which governs the startup parameters, runtime parameters of SAP System. 6. SAPDATA1 is created with datafiles saparch, oraarch, sapcheck, saptrace, sapreorg and redolog files (OriglogA, OriglogB, MirrorlogA, MirrorlogB) Database specific file system. 7. On Windows MMC(Gui based) is created to start and stop the SAP System To start and stop the SAP System 8. On UNIX startup scripts are created on <SID>ADM in Home Directory (startsap, stopsap) 9. Work directory is created in usr\sap\SID\DVEBMGS00\work used to host the trace files(Logs) which are generated during SAP system startup. 10. Oracle database uses (ORASID on UNIX other users like OPS$ Users, SAPSR3, SAPSR3DB) ORA<SID> is the owner of the database in UNIX

dev_w2 .V9start.log All the log files resides in Work Directory.cmd this command starts the database and writes the log files to stderr1.Startsap (Scripts) 3.170 <SID>ADM is the owner(Administrative Privileges) of the database in Windows Starting up of SAP System 1.pfl Startup Profile consists of a) Starting the database using command strdbs. 202..log c) Starts the Dispatcher using executable disp+work and write the log file into work\dev_disp and stderr. dev_w1. On UNIX login as <SID>ADM .consists of a entry . The IP addresses from 192/ 172/ 10 are private IP Addresses which can be used internally in the companies. When the process are started they read properties from Instance Profile SID_DVEBMGS00_HOSTNAME.pfl Such as number of work processes.log if it is not started it writes the log into stderr.. On Windows use SAPMMC/ Startsap to start the SAP System 2.cmd .65. In future there is possibility for address conflict.136. memory. 4.sql (From here we can find whether the database is up or not) b) Starts the Message server using executable msg_server.exe and writes the log into work directory dev_ms. dev_wn-1 11-Sep-09 192/ 172/ 10 Global IP Address (ARPANET) If we assign other than this the system are considered to be public.Open Terminal . When engine is started it reads the startup profile which is located in usr\sap\sid\sys\profile\start_DVEBMGS00_<hostname>. We need to buy public IP addresses from ISP's.146 . buffers etc and writes the logs into dev_w0.log which is in the work directory strdbs.

Q.171 NAT .log which resides in saptrace\ background directory Oracle\SID\saptrace\background Identify for Oracle errors that start with "ORA" Example 1033 . listener ports.Extended Binary Code.Product Availability Matrix 32 Bit . listener.Allocates upto 4 GB Virtual Memory (Hard Disk) . It is also called as Trace directory or Developer traces.Supports . listener hostnames.. Whenever a request comes from Internet to a public IP. listener status. database startup statuses etc.exe All the startup logs are stored in Work directory.Physical Memory (RAM) The Internet communication Manager ICMON started by using icom.log. cmd> lsnrctl 14-Sep-09 . Check the connectivity. If the database is not started then start the database and look into the log files alert<SID>.2GB 64 Bit . i. PAM . The work process is unable to connect to the database..e. It is translated to Private IP or Routed to PVT IP. they are available externally by using Public IP. Check the database is up and running by Start > run > sqlplus "as sysdba" 2.. System not started? 1. DB_Connect Issues.Network Address Translation All the servers are managed with Private IP but . EPSIBIC .

172 07-Jul-09 BASIS Recently SAP -Manufact uring -Retail Applicati on Server Allocates Processes Accelerates the requests INSTANCE It's an Agent Communicates .

no additional Web server is required as. in the case of the standalone ITS.Dispatcher As the load goes on increases we will go with adding a Dialogue Instance Accessing the BASIS repository over the web. tracing. 08-Jul-09 BASIS . ABAP BASIS BW into a common supply chain/ Platform The integrated ITS uses the common HTTP mechanism as in SAP Web AS.. Monitoring.0 (Service) will handle the user request. and for this SAP Implemented a component called ITS (Internet Transaction Server) separate tool windows specific. . Analysis. Administration. IIS (Microsoft internet information service) SAPWAS: SAP WEB APPLICATION SERVER which is capable of providing internet Including ICM 6. .. auditing and development.It provides a platform for User Management. performance.173 with Database with the Native SQL .It provides the runtime environment for all SAP Components.

MDMP has various disadvantages during upgrade i.e.. From SAPWEBAS 640 SAP provides only two versions (Non-Unicode and Unicode).User Management . Refer TCPDP table and I18N NON-UNICODE: languages..Sub Module of SCM BIW (Business Intelligence Warehouse). 2.e.0.Monitoring (CCMS) Computing Center Management System .174 SU01 SM21 RZ20 SM20 ST03 ST01 SECR SE38 . In future we can perform a UNICODE Migration.) but each additional languages should be imported. the characters are stored in more than one byte.Sub Module of SRM All these applications are robust. German.. . Ensure that the version is Unicode enabled like ECC6. stable. SMLT Languages like Chinese. Thai. Korean.. .Additional Life Cycle.Multi Display Multiple Language) on the same system. .System Trace . and consistent which are built on ABAP language. Dutch.Audit Information System .. (NON UNICODE to UNICODE) Process: UNICODE Migration 1. MDMP and introduced UNICODE to support all the languages i.Security Audit . It is similar to single code page and supports only the like minded When there are no plans to expand the business globally this is the best option.Work Load Monitor .ABAP Editor There are various BASIS platforms for R/3 APO (Advanced Planner and Optimizer). reliable. BI7.0.. due to this reason we need multicode page (MDMP . and CRM2005 etc.. EBP (Enterprise Buyer Professional) etc. LANGUAGE *************************** SINGLE CODE PAGE: The database is installed on a code page like 1100 which can support the like minded languages around 10 (En. SAP Stopped supporting blended (Multi) code pages i.e..Administration (System Logs) . and Japanese cannot be accessed using the above code page. Use SAP Installation Master DVD . code page conversion.

6c to ECC6. Upgrade Migration . Refer UCMIGR. 2. ITS installed on a separate machine or Application server to handle the web requests. These requests are forwarded to Agate. Note: As the Kernel is going to be changed during migration the whole database needs to be deleted.0 .NUC to Unicode. The web requests are received by Wgate which are in the form of .Source system . Unicode consumes 40% of additional resources than NUC. ITS consists of two gates (WEB Gate and APPLICATION Gate) Process Flow: 1.System copy .4. Note: We need to perform certain pre post steps. .HTML or ..175 . Target system System -> Import with Unicode Kernel. **************************** ITS: Internet Transaction Server In order to provide the web functionality to all SAP components ITS (Internet Transaction Server) is introduced by SAP.. In the earlier scenarios APPS Dispatcher used to handle the user request but in web scenario the HTTP requests are handled by ITS.export NUC 3.TASKS .CSS (Cascading Style Sheets).

5.176 Diag is a protocol that is used to handle the request coming from SAPGUI on port 3200 Series 3200 + Instance Number 3. Response is forwarded to Agate. Agate converts web request into Dynpro specific requests so that they can be handled by Diag Protocol. The Dispatcher in the Application server handles the request and process it. . 4.

177 Time Consuming Not an Integrated Service It depends on IIS (Internet Information Server) to host the pages Non Business User input -> Queue -> Assign a Counter -> Screen -> Withdrawal -> Insert.Internet Communication Manager) which is called IITS (Integrated Internet Server) Tcode: SITSPMON . Instead of ITS SAP included WEBAS 640 and included ICM service within the Application Server. Update or delete. (ICM .

0 SCM 4.. Work List. SAP introduced IITS which is integrated in WEBAS640.0. Logos etc.178 IE -> [ICM + IITS] WEBAS Introduction of WEBAS Until versions R/3 4. offline.0 CRM 4. chat. BIW 3.0 are the last basis components) SAP Introduced ICM (Internet Communication Manager) and named the platform as SAPWEBAS 6.6D) ITS provided the web functionality (APO 3. WEBEX. dynamic. It is accessed by the tcode: SITSPMON BIW 3. . this platform is going to be a common platform for all the SAP Applications even the ICM is introduced in SAPWEBAS and its still require ITS to process the web request. Knowledge Management. Rooms.6c (Kernel Version 4.0 Are the SAP components that are installed on a common platform SAPWEBAS 640.0 ECC 6. Subsequently SAPWEBAS 700 and 710 are released 09-Jul-09 WEBAS ABAP could not provide Colorful.0 SRM 4.5 ECC 5.0 XI 3.

Exchange Messages called as Process Integration (or) Intelligent Broker (or) BPM using an adapter.Exchange Infrastructure: Provides communication from one system to another system.179 Consider an Example - XI . .

BI.Knowledge Management CM .Content Management TREX Engine .Where the content is fetched either from BI.Text retrieval and classification engine searches the information and bring out from Terra Bytes of data.180 KM . XI. PI . Application Platform called as NETWEAVER . XI. as and when required The 4 Layers PI.

BI.PIPA P I P A . SAPWEBAS 640. SAPWEBAS JAVA 640.Application Platform Note: For Netweaver ABAP is mandatory as the business lies in ABAP. KM (Knowledge Management).181 MDM ERP ECC SCM SRM CRM .Supply Chain Management .Process Integration . NETWEAVER: Is a common platform which provides EP (Enterprise Portal). JAVA & Mobile Integration. Portal Content.Enterprise Resource Planning . PI content etc.Customer Relationship Management NETWEAVER . CM (Content Management).Information Integration .Supplier Relationship Management . PI. .People Integration .Enterprise Central Component . ABAP. provided as add-on.Master Data Management ..

. SR1. SCM.JAVA Development . EP. JAVA.Java Components .The respective database (DB2. MI (Mobile Infra).Mandatory for PI.Data Consistency Try to populate the data from one repository to different servers MDM5. Usage Types: Provides certain functionality to the business components. SR3 From Netweaver '04 S.JCE Policy (Java Cryptography Extension) . Mobile. Usage types are selected during the installation. MDM7. SR2. MDM: Master Data Management . XI. EP. and SRM) Netweaver Components: ABAP.. However WEBASABAP is a mandatory Note: EP (Enterprise portal is not a business component for Java and it is only meant for GUI and Formatting) and EP doesn't requires ABAP EP = EP Core + JAVA ERP and EP cannot put together in a single box. also called Netweaver '04 S.0 Netweaver Components accelerates the business components. BI. (OLTP) and (OLAP) XI . Usage types are ABAP. SQL. EPCORE EP CORE EP .. JAVA.Exports . ERP and BI cannot put together in a single box.communication between one process to another process.Both ABAP + JAVA required BIJAVA . Development Infrastructure. SR3 or Netweaver '07 all the above content provided on one single DVD. ORACLE. BI-Java PI . It provides runtime executables/ libraries that are required for SAP Engine (SAPWEBAS) The Installation master provides an option to install all the Netweaver components together with SAP application component (ERP. BI.The software that is required is Installation Master .JAVA. SR1. JAVA. EP. . Kernel resides at OS level.e. MaxDB) After installation the entire content resides in the database only. BI. EPCORE. ABAP . SR2. i.5.Kernel .Mandatory for all the components except for EP JAVA . PI. PI. CRM.182 Netweaver is introduced along with SAPWEBAS 640 but most of the components as add-on.

. (sapinst. 6. DDIC R/3 DB Owners : SAP<SID> upto WAS640 : SAPSR3 for ABAP on WAS700 : SAPSR3DB fro JAVA on WAS700 MSS : <SID> Select username from DBA_USERS. SCM etc. Netweaver Installation: 1.3999 .exe for windows and . CRM. Ports 3600 . However when we choose to install ERP.3297 . MSS (Microsoft SQL Server): <SID> OS (UNIX) : ORA<SID> R/3 Specific application users : SAP*. MaxDB.183 Infrastructure .JAVA MOBILE .ABAP Message Server 3900 . Use Installation Master 2.3697 . SQL. JAVA 10-Jul-09 Netweaver alone cannot bring business it should be coupled with one of the SAP Business component like ERP. System.which is used to provide secure communication over the web.Dispatcher port OS .. Provide the path for Software dump (Kernel. Outln.ABAP. Provide the following inputs 1./sapinst on UNIX) 3. CRM. JCE Policy (Java Cryprography . SCM they gets installed on ABAP platform which is a part of Netweaver. 5. Master password for the users : <SID>adm : SAPService<SID> DB : ORA: Sys. Select the installation Database (Oracle. 4.) 4. Select the respective Sapinst. Instance Number (00 to 97) 3. Exports. SID 2. JAVA Components) on UNIX we may need to abrupt the installation and install the database but on windows the database can be installed before in hand.JAVA Message Server 3200 .

59904 .Secured gateway port .17.01 (EHP1).4797 3300 .sap. BASIS) Enhancement Pckg : is an upgrade to the current functionality 700.SDM Ports (00 .4897 50000 . BW.com Startsap all : (Includes the Dialogue Instance) Startsap r3 Stopping ABAP Engine: Windows: UNIX : Starting JAVA Engine: Same as starting ABAP Engine Starting Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA): ABAP dispatcher starts the JAVA instance provided the parameter rdisp/ start_j2ee is set to true or use SMICM to start manually. MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) stopsap Notes (Patch) : This does the small corrections Support Package : Group of patches Support Stacks : Group of Support Packages (ABAP.Gateway port .Instance Number) Eg: https://201. 7.Dispatcher security port .JAVA instance port if instance number is 00 Say for eg if the instance number is 25 then 50000 (100 + 25) = 52500 04 is for Administration port : 52504 Say for eg 99 .SSL (Https) ref: help.184 4700 .22:50001 50001 Starting ABAP Engine: Windows: UNIX : MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) startsap .3397 4800 .Telnet Port 50026 .04 (EHP4) .59916 50008 .12. 7.

Database Instance Central Services instances are provided in JAVA Engine which consists of JAVA Message Server and Enque Server to provide load balancing to the web users and central locking for all the JAVA instances. Spool. Central Instance 3. .Foreground ABAP Instance: Central Instance DVEBMGS (Dialogue.185 Upgrade 640-700-710 Installation of Instances: It is an integrated installation which consists of 1. Dispatcher-JAVA is used to handle the requests and process them to server processes. Enque. BTC.sys in windows is used to clear the pages Resource at the disk level is a Semaphore. BTC Message. Central Services Instance 2. Note: ipcclean in UNIX pagefile. Update. Gateway and Spool) Except Message and Enque (Dia. Dialogue Process . gateway & Update) Database Processes Consists of Dispatcher & Server processes Dialogue Instance: Database Instance: JAVA Instance: Dispatcher-ABAP is used to handle the requests and process them based on FIFO Dispatcher allocates the requests to work process (Dialogue) for interactive communication.

186 .

Create Support Message.Service_Desk_change_st32A13 . For documentary.BCSet .187 11-Jul-09 A Business Configuration Set is a set of Customizing settings which are grouped according to logical. ABAP Request Handling .Maintain .OSS_MSG -Save .Create the change request . quality assurance and re-use purposes which is independent of the original Customizing tables/views which is accessible across the system landscape. Service Desk Creation. business management criteria to a unit.expert mode Continue Goto satellite system SM30 Look for BCOS_CUST Help . SCPR20 .

Task Handler interpret the request and submit the request to Database .188 . JAVA Request Flow .The database process the request and response is sent back to the user.Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue.User submits the request .Work process handles the request using Work Process Task Handler .Dispatcher serves the request based on FIFO . .The request is received by the dispatcher .User submits the request using GUI .Dispatcher assigns the request to Work Process .

JAVA Dialogue Instance (Optional) Process Flow 1. Process of JAVA Startup . . .Startsap command . It uses default profile to start the engine with minimal parameters that are required by all the Dialogue Instances.Server process assigns application thread manager to process the request . It also uses START_SCS01_<Hostname> for starting SAP Central Services 4. 5.Server process communicates with DB and the response is sent back to the user.or rdisp/j2ee_start=true used to start along with ABAP Engine but consumes at least 10 Mins to 30 Mins.Database Instance .Central Instance .189 . (During an update) JAVA Startup .Request is handled by JAVA Dispatcher .Server process processes the requests till it is completed/ or the memory is exhausted/ timeout .Use MMC . User uses any of the above startup methods to start the JAVA Engine 2.SMICM .Central Services Instance . It uses the instance profile to start the engine with instance specific (Memory Buffer etc) <SID>_SCS01_Hostname for SCS and <SID>_DVEBMGS00_hostname for Integrated Engine and <SID>_JC00_Hostname for Standalone Java Engine 6. In order to start the JAVA engine Jcontrol process is used to initialize the system. The system is started by using startup profile START_DVEBMGS_<Hostname> (Integrated Engine) START_JC00_<Hostname> (Standalone JAVA Engine) 3.Dispatcher assigns the least loaded server process .ATM Handles the user request internal process/ Intra process (For Locking) is handled by Server process. .Central services are used for load balancing and locking purposes.

1.properties and bootstrap initializes Jlaunch for dispatcher. files.properties JLaunch .server process JAVA Engine Startup Flow Note: JControl reads from SDM/config/sdm_jstartup.properties Error logs are stored in DEV_JControl from the WORK Directory DEV_JLaunch DEV_Dispatcher DEV_Icm It consumes more time to start because bootstrap reads the parameters from the database to instance.190 7.Dispatcher JLaunch . jlaunch for SDM and while initializing Jlaunch for server process it synchronize the binaries(All logs) of the dispatcher and the servers. JControl starts JLaunch process by reading instance. Explain the process of JAVA Engine startup & Describe the executables.? 6. What are the types of Installations and which of them are recommended based on the usage types? 3. What are the various profiles that are used during startup & Explain the significance of them? 5. What is JAVA Instance/ JAVA Cluster 2. logs and profiles that are used. What are the inputs that are required during the installation? 4. Explain the JAVA file system? LAB . JControl initializes the bootstrap process to read the parameters from 8.

My Computer .Advanced .10.Assign the computer name : willsys11 .under Advanced tab .Allocate 15.191 Installing SAP ECC6.under variable value : c:\j2sdk1.provide the system name : willsys11 .Organization name : willsys11 .2_12\bin .0 .under performance click on settings for C Drive for D Drive eg: 223467MB = 223GB .11 255.4.Install the j2sdk.2_12 (without \bin) .0.After installing copy the path from c:\j2sdk1.2_12 .000 MB = 15GB .0 on Win 2k3 Server Enterprise Edition Install the O/s .ok Setting Virtual Memory .Properties .17. se v1.4.Allocate the remaining During installation of O/S .click on New Set variable name : JAVA_HOME Set variable value: c:\j2sdk1.255.2_12\bin Set the Environment Variables from .0 Copy the SAP dump by accessing another machine \\willsys04\d$ Installing ECC6.4.4.Assign the product key .click on environment variables .ok Now under system variable Search for "path" and highlight it and click on edit .provide the Admin pwd : admin123 Install the LAN Drivers and assign the static IP Address : 172.

JAVA. BI JAVA.exe During Installation it prompts for various inputs .SID . Machine Type . Usage types ABAP.192 . EPCORE.provide the SID eg: W11 SAP Installation.custom size Initial size: 2046 Max-Size : 8000 If RAM is 2 GB we can select up to 8GB from HDD. PI and MI 2.Access the folder oraclelog\NT\Oracle\sapserver.JAVA Components . Installing Database .Oracle 10G .select advanced tab .Used to identify the usage types \usr\sap\<sid>\config\ usage. DI (Development Infrastructure).D: . 12-Jul-09 Usagetypes.Exports .properties Specifies the configuration of the Netweaver system 1.select C: drive and set .Master Password .click on change under Virtual Memory and Hit change .run sapinst.Kernel And prompts for SOLMAN Key get this from SOLMAN System.cmd .properties . . EP.

Admin Directory: Used for administrating the J2EE engine using Visual Admin tool. It also specifies the users that are created during installation along with the encrypted password.Straight away we can see the ABAP Engine It is the Instance directory which specifies the types of processes. J2EE: 1. IDM : Identity Management SAP* DDIC SAPCP These are not counted for Licensing DVEBMGS<Instance Number> . JAVA engine doesn't let us to create users as the Data source will be in ABAP. It contains the following directories. It consists of the following directories 2. DATA: Used for storing the lock entries. HP UNIX etc 3. engine type. It also contains the directory Standalone Log Viewer to display the logs of the J2ee engine if its not started. Dispatcher + Server = Local instance (Cluster) 2.properties to start the instance (We can find by what time the instance is started) . It specifies that the JAVA engine is installed on the Machine. Cluster: It specifies the dispatcher. server and bootstrap process. It contains binaries that are required to start the above process. Hostname and ports used along with backend ABAP Client.193 NT INTEL. The number of CPU's and CPU speed 5. statistical data etc DVEBMGS it is a Kernel directory (Soft link to the physical one) Internet Graphic Server which is used to provide graphic services over the web. System ID and Instance Number 6. This user reads the ABAP user master and ensure all the users are in the JAVA engine. Note: In an integrated installation (ABAP + JAVA) J2EE_ADMIN is the administrator and on standalone JAVA Engine (Administrator) is the userid that manages J2ee engine. 1. Note: SAPJSF user (Security Framework user) is created in ABAP Engine to communicate with JAVA Engine. instance number. Memory available on the system 4. IGS: 3. It also contains instance.

bat (. 5. \work directory: consists of developer traces. Adobe services etc.sh in UNIX) This tool is used as a part of the post installation and used to set the system with minimal parameters that are required for an usage type.1 NETWEAVER TOOLS \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\global Sys consists of system executables (Kernel). SAP Provides predefined templates to configure BW. SDM: <sid>\DVEBMGS . J2EE engine etc. Double click on cfgtemplategui.194 Cluster\dispatcher\log Defaulttrace. profiles.Software Deployment Manager It is used to apply the patches for various Netweaver640 and 700 and it is discontinued in 7. Log Directory: sol\DVEBMGS00 it specifies the MMC log/ SM21 Logs with log goto slog . template config tool. EP.trc is a file available in the log directory for both server and dispatcher. 1. XI folders. global directory. Sys\exe directory : Consists of run time executables (Kernel) Sys\profile directory: consists of profiles to start and also to control the behavior of the instance Sys\global directory: consists of SLD (system landscape directory). 3.bat Under choose action . JSPM: it is a tool to apply patches (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 6. XI. JVM Logs (Java Virtual Machine). Deploying: It is a tool that is used to deploy the small programs in to the JAVA engine.clear all the logs and that is equal to Syslog.0. Template Config Tool : It resides in global directory \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\global It is initialized by cfgtemplategui. Standard error logs starts with std and these are used to debug the startup errors. 4. Config Tool: It provides a tool to change parameters of the instances either globally or locally.

ear (Enterprise archives). config. SDM is started as a process using the executable jlaunch. . CPU etc Note: Should not be executed after setting up the system because it will over write the changes. It requires SDM Server data like hostname & SDM port 50018 During initialization it will read the repository information from sdmrepository. Log Viewer Standalone tool: It is used to provide the log access at O/S level when the instance is not started and also used to display the logs based on search text. SDM is initialized by using remotegui.JAR) Changing the SDM Password: if SDM password is unknown we can set a new password using command line interface .standalone 3. (Displays the logs in user friendly format) \usr\sap\<sid>\DVEBMSG\j2ee\admin\logviewer.195 Select apply and hit next. 2.0 onwards.jar (JAVA Archives). SAP recommends to use JSPM from 7. In WEBAS 640/ NETWEAVER 640 JSPM is not available and in NW710 SDM is not available.sda (SAP Deployable archives). SDM has its own directory which contains binaries. severity etc. SDM : Software deployment manager This is used to deploy and undeploy the support packages.zip..sdc (\sdm\prog\config) During deployment (applying the support pack) it takes backup of the repository. It is recommended to execute in the initial stages. . Select the template file and click next Used to set memory. date and time. It is started by using sdm_jstartup. log and libraries.sca (SAP component Archive) .bat from \usr\sap\sol\DVEBMGS\SDM\program. small developments that are coming with extension . The major advantage of SDM is to undeploy the support packages(during conflicts) but its a disadvantage when compared with system consistency because it can undeploy the dependent packs also.properties in the \sdm\program\config.war (Web archives) etc. There will be only one SDM in the entire system. . SDM Directory contains a document related by SDM itself (SDMKIT. .

SDM reads the files from the specified location not eps/in and it has its own inbox to process the deployment. 5. Depending upon the nature of the patch it updates any one of the above Click on next and click on start deployment Logviewer tab provides the deployment status along with the duration of the deployment. click on Deployment Tab. The patch status is obtained from system . 13-Jul-09 4. login to SDM Tool 4. SDM can be started in standalone or in integrated mode using command sdm jstartup sdmhome =<. Default mode is integrated and standalone mode is used to change the password. Download the support pack from the market place. 2. It is initialized by using a script configtool. Click add browse for . the window is closed but the SDM Client is still connected to the server in this case we need to restart the SDM. PRD) are accessed (Not mandatory to EPS) directory 3...> [mode = integrated/ standalone] Note: it is always recommended to logoff from the SDM instead of closing the window.information option in the home page http://<hostname>:50000 SDM startup modes are standalone/ Integrated.. QTY..bat /. Note: In order to change the password SDM should be running in standalone mode. patch location can be a database. Deploy (or) copy the patches into the shared folder so that (DEV. Deploying a support pack through SDM 1. Modifications will get effect only after a restart of the J2ee engine (the parameters are static) J2ee engine startup is not required to work with config tool. It is used for the following purposes a) To increase the server processes up to MAX 16 .sca file and hit next 6.196 sdm changepassword. file system or J2ee engine.sh on UNIX It resides in \usr\sap\<sid>\dvebmgs00\j2ee It connects to the database to modify the parameters of the J2ee engine when the engine is offline or online. Config Tool: Used for Offline configuration.

login Authorized . JVM contains Byte code verifier and class loader.Executing tasks These files are interpreted by using JAVA Virtual Machine. JAVA VIRTUAL MACHINE It is a platform specific software provided by sun Microsystems.java) it is compiled into bank. It consists of java run time environment to interpret the JAVA programs.197 cluster = disp + server process Note: if we want to have more than 16 then we have to include dialogue JAVA instance. this option is used to enable SAP* user. Visual Admin Tool: .JAVA (eg bank. This is the reason why JRE is required to execute JAVA Program. d) It is used to configure the user management to LDAP engine ie. users who are created in AD (Active Directory) server. (Platform specific JVM should be installed on the customers system) b) It is used to configure various managers and services. a) When JAVA programs are defined they used to save extension .class file. This class file will be distributed to the customers irrespective of the operating system Authenticate . when SAP* is enable no other user can work on the system. LDAP protocol is used to transfer the users from AD to the Application platform. b) it is used to configure the JVM (JAVA Virtual Machine) memory settings. Initially JVM checks the class files and verify the bytes in the code and then signals to load the class file to display the screens/ Logic executed. The server processes are used to handle the user requests. This is required when memory is available to configure the additional server processes. c) It is used to store the Administrator password using option secure store. To handle the load we have to add server process. It is the only tool used to modify the JVM Settings. (ABAP/ JAVA) e) Offline configuration mode to change certain parameters eg: when all the users are locked. Unlock the admin users and disable SAP* (two restarts are required) f) It works only on the database as it needs to connect to the database using the OS authentication (doesn't require any userid and password) 5.

10 NW but widely used in 640/ 700.bat /. Command=> 0 to Exit Command=> 30 to refresh the instance data (It is used to clear the shared memory in use) 12 . It is discontinued in 7. 14-Jul-09 6. Shell Console Tool (or) Telnet tool It is used to login to the system remotely when the system is congested (Hourglass mode). memory and restart the processes if required. It needs admin user . password.sh in UNIX which resides in j2ee\admin It works only online because it needs to connect to J2ee engine. It can connect from any system using the above credentials.1 only 7.1 SAP provides Shell Console Tool in the J2ee Directory and up to Netweaver 7. JCMON or JControl Monitor It is initialized by using command line executable jcmon suffix with Jcmon pf ="path of the instance profile" Eg: D:\usr\sap>jcmon pf=d:\usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile\wis_dvebmgs_hostname It provides the menu to administer cluster.To identify the processes . It is used to configure various services and managers. It can also used to start/stop various services and applications. From Command prompt telnet <Ipaddress/Hostname> telnet willsys11 50008 <port number> Provide the login details as J2EE_ADMIN and the password Prompt changes to > > lsc (list services) > man (gives the manual) In Netweaver 7. hostname and port p4 (50004).198 This is an admin tool which is used to change the static and dynamic parameters (Except JVM) It is initialized by using go.0 telnet tool has to be executed manually from the command prompt. \usr\sap\<sid>\DVEBMSG\shellconsole from 7.

Specify the patches target level (Select or Skip) Note: In earlier cases before applying any packs need to apply SPAM but here JSPM. Initialize JSPM by using go.0 to replace SDM tool. patches from \usr\sap\trans\eps\in Similar to SPAM but it works on SDM port and password. It is initialized by go. JSPM is used to deploy business packages like employee self service. manager self service. JSPM has its own patch level similar to SPAM which is updated by JSPM.199 5 . new software components & additional usage types. The another major advantage is the patches can be deployed arbitrarily like 1 to 5 (i. . consistency between support packages are checked and displays the source and target patch levels. Select the type of the package to apply Eg: Single Support package JSPM reads the EPS\In directory and displays if a valid support pack is available.sar etc) and place them in EPS\In Ensure that the logged in user is <SID>ADM. It is also used to upgrade kernel where the system will be restarted as per the requirement (NW Consultant should take the backup of the kernel) Process: Download the respective software into EPS\In directory (. JSPM .bat Specify the SDM Password (SDM and JSPM should not be operated simultaneously to avoid inconsistency of the system).sca. SDM is not available in NW 7.1 It reads the support packages.e missing the sequence).JAVA Support Patch/ Pack Manager tool It is introduced in Netweaver 7. . It is only executed in the <SID>ADM home. It is also used to control the transport of objects between systems in the landscape. The main advantage of JSPM is undeployment is not possible.This is used to monitor the status of the instance 8. .bat which is available in JSPM directory.sda. (The environment required for JSPM is provided by user <SID>ADM.

performance. UME .EHP1 . administration. User admin is a part of NW Identity Management tool. It is used to perform the post installation activities based on the usage types. Also used to start/stop various services.001. JSPM maintains its own log files if any dependencies are missing it will abort the deployment. SLD Tool (System Landscape Directory) http://<hostname>:50000/sid It is a landscape information provider service to provide the information of all the systems in the landscape along with products.For user management PORTAL . 11.10 all the visual admin tool tasks are performed by NWA Tool.0 and used for JAVA engine. USER Admin Tool It is used to administer the users. 9.for Portal engine J2ee . clients information etc. process and applications.roles Note: ABAP roles are groups in JAVA Engine. NWA Tool (NETWEAVER Admin Tool) It is available since NW7. patch levels. Standalone JAVA engine has various options lie user creation and password management in the user admin tool but whereas in the integrated engine the user management is taken over by ABAP Engine except assigning J2EE roles. 10. memory. From NW7. Select the target SP level can click on next to deploy the patches. (000.200 Support Packs SOL ERP NW . software components. components etc similar to ST03.18 EHP1 . 066) . It provides reports related to users. configuration and monitoring.For J2ee Engine ABAP .EHP4 Note: Among the selected packages SAP Identifies which one be prioritized first in this case JSPM goes first. groups and roles.

Standalone log viewer 6. JSPM (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 7. PI and became a mandatory component as per ITIL/ Standards Infrastructure Library. NWA (Netweaver Admin Tool) 11. Visual Admin 5.201 It is accessed by using the url : http://202. Shell Console (Telnet) 9. User Admin 10. SDM (Software Deployment Manager) 4. JCMON (JControl Monitor) 8.146:50000/sld It is effectively used in XI.136. Config Tool 3. Template Config Tool. 2. SLD (System Landscape Directory) JAVA Startup Framework .65. 15-Jul-09 1.

202 .

Libraries. Application Thread Manager . JControl initialises JLaunch (Server Process) 9. Dispatcher Kernel. JControl initialises JLaunch (SDM) 8. Server Kernel. \server0\apps\sap.203 DVEBMGS\ J2ee\ cluster\ server0\cfg\kernel Applications lies here for sync. JControl Initialization 2.Server Starts the Application Note: Thread Manager is for System process Thread Application Manager is for the customer (Dispatcher cannot handle ATM) Kernel provides runtime which consists of Managers to work at J2ee Engine level The J2ee Engine contains the following Managers 1. Bootstrap reads properties from DB 4. Initialize bootstraps (Cluster) 3. DTD: Data type definition JAVA Startup Framework 1. Bootstrap updates instance.properties 5. Binaries are synchronized before they get started 10.com Applications only sync by the server process. JControl Initialises Jlaunch (DISP) 6. Libraries are synchronized before they get started 7.

.. These are also used to perform certain post-installation activities.e.. one for server and the other for the dispatcher Services: These are similar to SAP Transactions to perform certain tasks on the J2EE engine. .204 So each manager/ service has four values and the priority of execution as follows Global Default Global Custom Local default Local Custom Global configuration doesn't have any ID Eg: Have 5 dialogue instances with 5 server process each. It needs to maintain 5 Dispatchers/ 25 server process which requires editing the config tool 30 times or simply use Global configuration and edit only 2 times i.

It is also used to set the traces for certain activities. Logs: These are by default written to the default log locations without any initiation/ Initiative. Difference between categories & locations Logs & Traces We can also switch SQL Trace similar to ST05 to identify the expensive SQL Statement. These are logged into locations. Buffer ST05 Trace) the traces. logs. 16-Jul-09 3.sap. Most of the services are available both in config tool and visual admin tool. Enque. It can be edited by choosing the server/dispatcher. Log Viewer Service: It is used to display the logs and it is similar to standalone log viewer service. Licensing Adapter Service: This is used to apply the license from the text file. VA services are explanatory than config tool services and also VA provides additional functionality.205 1. Log configuration Service: This is similar to SM18/ SM19 to trace the user activities.service. Set the granularity of the log level (Using Min & Max) Severity is also setup based on requirement. J2ee\cluster\dispatcher\log 2. These are logged into categories. Eg: In Log Configurator Service Tracing option is provided in VA Tool whereas in config tool it is not provided. It is used to set (SQL. Traces: These are explicitly switch on by the user to trace the user activities. Goto Market place : www. RFC. It is used to set the log locations for the applications.com click on SAP Support Portal under FOR CUSTOMERS Provide SUSERID and pwd Click on Keys and Request Tab . or using the service in config tool/ Visual admin tool.

9999 and the other one is maintenance certificate which is valid up to 3 months. Maintenance certificate locks the SPAM and JSPM after 3 Months. For ABAP .SDM & JSPM Apply the license through Market place Display license script Download to PC From Visual Admin . 4.0 (2004 S) System: NT/ INTEL Database: Hit Continue Note: In earlier versions we use to type the command saplicense -get From Visual Admin Tool Licensing Adapter for Hardware Key Note: It contains 2 licenses one is standard license (Permanent) which is valid till 31. JCORFC Provider Services: It is similar to SM59 used to create RFC connections to the backend systems.JCoRFC Provider Provide : Program ID : JAVA_2_ABAP Gatewayhost : WILSOLMAN Gateway Service : Sapgw00 Service Count :4 .206 Click on Request Permanent License Key Select the Installation Type Click on New System Provide SID as PRD System Name : Hostname System Type Product: NW Version: NW 7.Click (Install license from File) and Upload the file. Program ID plays an important role to establish connection between the systems.SAINT & SPAM For JAVA .12. From Visual Admin Tool .

Password. For single Prog ID Max 20 RFC can be generated. if not manually run/ start the application. It is also useful to deploy the small application like (*. Userid. Client. Specify Hostname.ear format files .ear) Enterprise Archive files. Deploy Service: It is used to start and stop the deployed applications. It is widely used in XI/ PI to check the specified applications are running. On server side we have to set Cache Size up to 999 and file buffer size & Other parameters specified bye SAP from VA Tool. They will wait in the queue until they are processed (or) timeout (This is applicable for dispatcher only). Language (Details of the backend system) 5. Specify Program ID. Gateway Host (If the gateway is installed separately) Gateway service (< Instance>) Server Count (To specify the number of server processes that can work simultaneously for this Program ID.Services HTTP Provider Keep Alive time to 75 instead 15 Sec. HTTP Provider Service : It is used to handle the request and keep them in socket queue.207 Application Server System Number : 00 Client Logon Lang User : wilsolman : 001 : en : sapuser (Backend EP System) SMGW is the T-Code to verify whether the connection is established or not. Note: [ANT] is a tool to archive . From VA Tool .Click on Deploy The small programs which are developed in-house are moved using this service (When NWDP not in place) Netweaver Development Infrastructure. 6. From Visual Admin Dispatcher .

Performance Tracing It is similar to SE30 runtime analysis of ABAP Program and ST05 system trace to trace SQL. We need to switch on the trace explicitly for a specific module along with the user name. Eg: If the defined threads are completely used then Thread congestion occurs.208 7. Security Provider Service It is similar to SU01. SLD Data Supplier Service: This service populates the JAVA Engine information into SLD for every 720 Minutes (12Hrs) in ABAP Engine RZ70 is used to populate SLD. We can select the user and release the lock. Buffers and enqueue. If no threads are available the system marks the respective Manager/ Service in traffic light signals (Yellow-Green) in this case it is Red. JARM (JAVA Application Response Time Management) Used to fetch the information of users. component and requests. (Process needs to be followed) Enqueue Table (100MB size) determines the locking table size enque/table_size 8. Similar to ST03-(Work Load Analysis) 11. Monitoring Service It is used to provide monitoring for all the kernel. UME Provider Service: . Locking Adapter Service It is similar to SM12 and is used to identify the users who are explicitly locking the resources for update. It is similar to CCMS Monitor (RZ20) alert monitor. threads. Pfcg which is used to create users and assign roles. 13. RFC. 12. 9. 10. services and performance of the system. It is also similar to SM04 to display the login Users.

Both the systems are used to maintain the landscape information.10 onwards VA tool is discontinued instead NWA is implemented. Note: Form Netweaver 7. LDAP.for Integrated SU01. Installed additional dialogue instances 13. UME(Java Itself)) define user store. Defined process documentation 14. Configuring logs (Log Configurator) 3. Applying license (Licensing Adapter Service) 2. Enterprise Manager in SQL Server 12. add-ons using SDM & JSPM (Update the system to level 18) 11.209 It is used to set the logon parameters similar to security parameters that starts with login in RZ10 Login\password digits Login\lang etc. 16.This is content repository This two information's are updated by SAP as per Note 669669 . CR_Content . Installed Netweaver Developer studio to start the development. 9. Defined backup schedule using BRTools (Oracle). Need to take complete \usr directory backup for JAVA CIM . Assigning security roles using security provider service. Defining Admin Users 7. Configuring JAVA System to send information to SLD (SLD Data Supplier Service) 6. Note: Solution Manager installed with usage type JAVA and SLD is configured on it. Working with UME Provider service to restrict the parameters of userid and password 8. Define System Landscape (http://<hostname>:50000/devinf) usage type DI should be selected. Define RFC connections from JAVA to backend systems (JCORFC) 10. Configured JVM memory using config tool. 17. Adding Server Process (Config Tool) 4. Defined the user management UME . 15. Configuring Time out period (Http Provider) 5. 17-Jul-09 Post Installation Activities for JAVA Engine: 1.Component Information Model. for a standalone JAVA engine (SU01. Applying patches. Configured SLD 18.

...... 19. JAVA System Copy 2.210 Always one patch less than the Market place available patch. DB Refresh/ System Refresh DEV QAS PRD Restoring 120GB 125GB PRD QAS 2009 (500GB) Rename PRD to QAS Repository consists of Functions.. Scenario: 1. Goto DB13 or BRTOOLS to schedule backup.. On the SQL Server ... Or Select database rt click .....Backup BRTOOLS Backup Recover Restore tool DB13 calls internally BRTools. Screens..Management Studio Select the system Goto Maintenance plan Define the schedule for backup...... Programs etc.. Heterogeneous System Copy .. System Copy of JAVA Based systems System Copy / Homogenous Copy Existing System PRD Upgrade PRD without touching the box PRD... OS For this take the backup of PRD DB New system build Patches Install central instance Sapinst Tool Install database ....

In this case it exports the directory structure. 1. Code page conversion 2.Additional software tasks life cycle . OS / DB Migration changing OS or DB Note: It is a time consuming process because the complete database content is exported into an independent format which will suite to all operating systems and databases. File System 2.Preparation Export Split . SDM and application specific content.select source system (PRD) . Database backup Only export the file system . (D:\tmp) 18-Jul-09 Discussion class about System Copy.select export database 1.211 JAVA System Copy/ DB refresh ERP CRM SCM SRM EP XI BI DI With JAVA Stack SAP Provides system copy option in the installation master DVD from Netweaver onwards. Insert Installation master .Goto the target system import the database System Copy: While performing a system copy using SAP tools it will prompt whether database can be exported (use database specific methods) This option should be unchecked if we are performing the following. 19-Jul-09 No class 20-Jul-09 . In case of a system refresh select Database specific tools so that the DB can be restored from a valid backup which will minimizes the export and import.

It should atleast 20GB or 3 times the RAM (which ever is larger) Shared Memory: The memory that is shared by OS DB and R3 Processes. Local Memory: The memory reserved for a work process Ztta/ roll_area Extended Memory: The memory that is exclusively measured for all the SAP WP (It is a part of shared memory) . Virtual Memory: (SWAP) The memory that is installed could not cater to the requirements of the users so a part of disk is used temporarily which is referred as virtual memory.212 Memory Management Physical Memory: The memory that is installed on the machine and allocated to the machine by PHYS_MEMSIZE.

Eg: Note: Use only 50% of Extnd Memory for PVT Minimizing the work process will causes Hour Glass .WP congestion or Hour glass Mode WP goes to pvt mode then use DPMON and kill the session. Memory Usage sequence: Zttaroll_first Zttaroll_ext Roll_Area ABAP/ Heap 20 KB 500MB 20MB 2 GB PVT Mode DIA . ABAP/heaplimit ABAP/heap_area_dia ABAP/heap_area_nondia ABAP/heap_area_total Note: If any error encountered like Storage_parameters_wrong_set its a memory issue.213 Ztta/roll_extension per user context Em/initial_size_mb = 512MB Heap Memory: The memory that is dedicated to a process till the completion of the task or timeout.

Roll. ST02 Over all memory Page.214 Eg: Search for Rdisp* from Rz10 Rdisp/max_priv_time Rdisp/wppriv_max_no (wont waits for default 600secs) Eg: Say for eg: 4GB 50% 2GB 2GB/ 250 = 8 Note: SM04 is used to find how much memory is consuming with Tcode. Heap SM50 Refer : SM56/ SM66 Note: All the memory parameters need a restart as the memory is @ OS level. Command soladm> memlimits Multiple instances on a single server Then for eg : 64GB 16 16 16 16 PHYS_MEMSIZE .

Heap memory is configured using -XMS 1024M from config tool. If this memory is not sufficient then it uses the extended memory i. 3. The programs are loaded using class loader. This memory should be configured by (PHYS_MEMSIZE). only local configuration is allowed. JAVA uses heap memory to ensure that the requests are completed. 2. configured by ztta/roll_extension 4.. It is only configured for Active instances i.10 Users. If local memory is not sufficient the it uses the heap memory that is configured by abap/heap_area_dia which is a part of abap/heap_area_total 6. if the work process uses the heap memory it is said to be in private mode and its runtime cannot be controlled by Rdisp/max_wp_runtime but it is controlled by Rdisp/max_priv_time If more number of WP goes into pvt mode then memory bottle neck/ hourglass/ WP congestion occurs which can be resolved by killing the expensive work process using DPMON because logon is not possible to kill through SM50. byte codes are verified before they are interpreted. If Extended memory is not sufficient then it uses the remaining part of the local memory i. Dispatcher and server has their own values. In order to roll in the User Context it consumes memory that is configured by memory ztta/roll_first. Each WP required around 75MB to 150MB (DVEBMGS) of memory. configured by ztta/roll_area 5. . JAVA MEMORY ALLOCATION JAVA memory is managed by JAVA Virtual machine. When a user request for a resource the Work Process rolls the user context for handling the task. The above scenario is on process based.215 MEMORY ALLOCATION: 1.e. Each dialogue WP serves 5 .e.e.

216 While interpreting the requests if a new content is fetched it uses NEW GENERATION MEMORY which is configured by parameter. 21-Jul-09 JAVA Authorization Concept . Heap memory = OLD + NEW GENERATION MEMORY For server process the new generation memory will be 1/6th of the Heap size or 1/4th of the PERM size.User Master record in SAP system . packages.XX:MAXNEWSIZE It will be 1/3rd the size of heap memory Eg: for 1GB(1024) Heap 341MB PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY: If the content that is interpreter is required permanently (JVM) (classes. If the content is not eligible to store it will be thrown into garbage (GC) Should be careful while changing the memory parameters 1. It is configure by the parameter -XX: PERMSIZE -XX: MAXPERMSIZE It will be around 1/4th of the Heap memory. It effects only after restarting the system.It provides userid and password .SU01 or USR02 table authentication in SAP system . . Note: Only server process requires more memory because it needs to process the user requests.XX:NEWSIZE . OLD GENERATION MEMORY: (Tenured Generation) If the content is old and can be reused then it will uses OLD/ Tenured generation.the data/functions that needs access are provided with the help of Roles and Profiles. methods) then it will uses PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY. It is calculated by using new generation memory. .

bat) JAVA Authorization Concept ABAP using SU01 JAVA Using UME Directory Server Using LDAP UDDI provider Goto Security Provider service in Visual Admin tool . Directory server using LDAP 4. Universal Description Discovery and Integration is used to populate the users from the third party database (Oracle. users can be populated in ABAP engine using LDAP. Siebel etc).e.JAVA uses (Userid and Pwd) Authentication method comes from user store. surc.Authorization activities table creation of TACT & TACTZ . The default store is UME store (User Management Engine). ABAP + JAVA). su20.User Management Change Mode . It is an industry standard to populate the users from one database to other using web services. ABAP Engine 2. su22. User store can be 1. Using ABAP SU01 (Mandatory in case of an Integrated Installation i. It is also possible to have LDAP in the back end engine i. . 3. The details are available in UME Provider Service from VA tool. We can also use VA tool to get the configuration of the back end engine. UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration) How to configure user Goto Security Provider in Visual Admin Tool (go. UME resides in J2ee Engine UME can get the users in the following ways 1.217 .Authorization objects. su24.e.Click on Manage Security Store Do not modify the store unless it is recommended by SAP. Note: No need to create RFC's to have the users to replicate in JAVA which has been created in ABAP (SU01) & LDAP. JAVA Engine itself. pfud . Authorization fields & Activities Pfcg.

Config Tool (usr\sap\<sid>\jc01\j2ee\config tool.218 Note: In case of Integrated engine.e.Microsoft Active Directory).bat) Select UME LDAP data and provide the following info. UME can get the users from any one of the following Data source. ABAP engine take over the complete user management i. . IPlanet. a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) b) SU01 of ABAP Engine c) UME itself d) UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration) a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) It is used to populate the users from a directory server (MSADS . users are created only through SU01 (The back end engine can get users from either LDAP or CUA) Note: No Client Mechanism in JAVA Engine Stand alone JAVA Engine In order to ensure the consistency of user management SAP Allows only one data store to populate the users. (Lotus-Domino from IBM). Goto .

.219 (datasource_ldap. Save and restart to get this effected.security provider service ..... userid/ pwd... password to read the info from ADS .User management to create users Roles: Roles are used to provide access to data and functions.specify the server port . c) UME Engine The UME manages users by itself (Very rare) Goto .. account and group path...xml) ..UME Provider service / User Admin tool Click on configuration Select the abap. * SAP_BC_JSF_Communication_RO (read only) we can also cerate our own user but the above role is required to communicate with J2ee.. b) Users from ABAP engine Goto .. .. willsys..saperp..net .... SAPJSF .. http://<hostname>:50000/ useradmin Click on Configuration_provider and provide the above details.User Admin to create user Assign roles etc We can also use Visual Admin tool .. As discussed above users are only populated from the backend systems we need to assign roles in the J2ee engine to access the functionality over the web so..xml file and specify Client. The same can be configured using User Admin tool.this user contains the role....specify the userpath. Logon lang and host name.specify the active user..save and test the connection/ Test authorization Userpath: it shows where the users are placed common name : BASIS The above information is provided by Domain administrator..... 389 (default for MSADS) . in order to access a report on the web the user should have permissions .Specify the server name .

To work on JAVA Engine . TDRG 22-Jul-09 ROLES JAVA Roles Actions Permissions Defined in programs ABAP Roles Authority check Authority Object field value Role: Is the collection of favorites. SU54 Authorization Group. If any one of them are missing user cannot access the functionality.220 both on the J2ee/ ABAP (back end system).are the groups in JAVA Group of roles are controlled by authorization group. Roles are used to protect the base of the JAVA Engine NOTE: SAP_ALL (S_RFC is not accessed) ABAP roles wont play any role in JAVA authorization SOX: Segregating roles to different users. A business transaction should not be assigned to a single person to avoid the fund misusage . composite profiles etc. R/3 Roles are groups in JAVA Engine UME Roles Security Roles R/3 Roles .To restrict the application . menus. Refer: TDDAT.

Actions are assigned to the roles Note: There is no need to create UME roles unless SOX is in place.221 Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) 23-Jul-09 AUTHORIZATION ROLES: Roles provide the activities that can be performed by user.Permissions are grouped into actions . Each program that needs control is defined by permissions. UME Roles 2. . UME Roles: J2ee core engine is built with Java programs. ABAP roles does not have any authorization in JAVA Engine. J2EE Security roles. a) User Administration b) Role and Administration c) Support and Administration J2EE Security Roles . JAVA Roles are defined as 2 types 1.

SAP_BC_Roles SU.SM59 1. pages to display the above data. Java roles provide screens. However other application roles will be displayed as portal roles. CCMS) SM (Monitoring) ST (traces. During deployment the descriptions should specify the roles. In most of the programs web. these roles will be moved to portal roles and can be assigned using User Admin tool. Portal roles are application roles that are used to protect business packages.222 SAP Applications are ported on J2EE Engine. As the programs needs security the developer should identify and define them during development. Functional information. Material information. Even though full authorization is provided in JAVA engine we may not able to access the content/ functionality in the back end system unless ABAP roles are assigned to the user. Create an (System User) not SU01 user 5 Define LDAP Server by using connector 6. Define a connection of Type T 3. Example: SLD: The role name is lcradministrator is now displayed as UME Role. Execute SM59 2. Due to the discontinuation of VA Tool. Note: ABAP roles are used to protect the sensitive data like HR information.Security provider service . These applications provide functionality to communicate with backend system (functionality means screens. Specify the connection (LDAP Connector) 4. programs or generic connection to the back end) Each Application should be defined with roles that appears as J2EE security roles.t. The traffic light should be green . RZ (Profiles. These roles need to be assigned to the users using VA tool. User should authenticate to login JAVA and Authorized to access the screens. Connect to the LDAP server using system user 7. Sale Info etc.xml contains the roles and these are displayed in Visual Admin tool .r.Services . SU01) 8. Alerts. Transport) LDAP . Define LDAPMAP for user attributes (users that are defined in ADS needs to be mapped w. Also should have authorization in the back end engine.Security roles.

identify the missing indexes etc) . Log files in cluster directory and archive them frequently. 5.(It purely depends on the backend system database time) 10. Schedule synchronization using RSLDAPSync_user 11.trc J2ee\cluster\server0 3 Monitor the space (there should not much growth on the file system. Ensure that traces are not switched on during normal operations(they will fill the OS and the J2EE engine may not be started) 8. Log files such as default. 9. Use log viewer service to monitor the logs related to the applications. 333 Where as for SAPSR3 29327 6. component overview and identify the critical requests with high response time. Use RSLDAPTEST in SA38 to test ADS (Active Directory Server) JAVA Monitoring 1. JAVA require only memory and CPU no need of DB Request -----> JAVA ----->Stores in the ERP ABAP System Select count(*) from DBA_TABLES where owner = 'SAPSR3DB'. patch application. unless the log files grow abnormally. Monitor the work directory so that Dev_Rfc. Using monitoring service to monitor the user request overview. Use LDAPLog to check the user synchronization logs. The response time is defined as 2 to 3 seconds depending on the system resources. 2. The backend system may sabotage(damage) the response time of J2ee Engine so it is also required to fine tune the back end systems (running DB stats. The DB growth will be normal as there were no updates but keep an eye on the size of DB if custom updates are defined. 10.223 9. 7. Dev_Rd are not populated largely (the growth indicates the RFC issue). tran/eps/in (Can be cleared) 4. Monitor the growth of the Archived logs.

It is a manufacturing. XMII and BI Note: X Cross APPs . Upgrade the system to NW EHP1 15. MSS. Performed backup of the SLD so that it can be imported during SLD Inconsistencies 23. Define the landscape and include all the systems in the landscape. 24. User creation and role assignment 12. . 26.224 11. Defined XI Domain and included technical & business systems. Installed standalone gateway/ and configured parameter Data supplier 18. Defined products. Displayed the SLD Logs during Import errors 25. software components for third party vendors. 22. 17. 19. Configured JAVA engine using SLD DS service to populate info in to SLD 20. Deployed business packages like ESS. SOLMAN Administration TADM 10_2 SLD SLD is only a landscape information service based on J2EE engine. Defined technical systems of ABAP. Worked with SLD assigned roles LCR* to configure SLD both manually and using NWA Tool. Patching the systems using SDM and JSPM 13. Upgrade the kernel to level 185 14. Configured ABAP engine using RZ70 to populate information into SLD. JAVA and NON-SAP systems 21. integration and Intelligence 16. Imported the latest CR Content into SLD from the Market place.

deploy and change configuration views . SLD can be initialized by using NWA tool.225 24-Jul-09 SLD: SYSTEM LANDSCAPE DIRECTORY AND SOLUTION MANAGER SLD provides the landscape information of both SAP and NON-SAP systems.click . This is required as a part of the ITIL standards. IT Infrastructure library standards. DMTF. SLD on a standalone J2EE engine is not available to other systems. By default SLD is configured in the J2EE engine. It can be assigned using Visual Admin Tool but now in User Admin Tool. NWA tool is to check the SLD. Eg. Startup and also the availability of SLD to other systems.Distributed Management task force is an initiative to provide the information of the available systems in the landscape. because SLD needs a gateway which is available through ABAP engine. In order to work with SLD we need lcradministrator role.DMTF SLD is available using url http://<hostname>:50000/sld. To work with standalone gateway to be installed on the SLD. SLD . RZ70 NWA Tool .

226 . etc. MI. Installing Standalone Gateway: Sapinst.Standalone Engine .All configuration tasks Post Installation activities can be done from here for PI. EP.exe . but it is recommended to use RZ70 in ABAP engine . BI.Gateway .Gateway installation SLDDSUSER (for Directory Server User) SDAPIUSER (for communication) Created with master passwords SLD_UC SLD_NUC RFC's are created to establish communication with SLD.Initial configuration or . REGISTERING ABAP SYSTEM: We can register a system in SLD.Netweaver 2004s .

Automatic (Recommended) RFC to SLD_UC/ SLD_NUC. Specify the RFC (Use explicit if there is an RFC customized to communicate with SLD. The system is registered in SLD REGISTERING NON-SAP SYSTEMS Systems like XI. Specify the SLD Bridge information SLD host and the gateway (we need to install gateway in case of J2EE engine) 4. Used to register ABAP. JAVA and NON-SAP Systems.227 Specify the following details 1. It provides the available and current patch level information using CIM/ CR_Content (Component Information Model and Content Repository) This information is updated by downloading from SAP Market place using note 669669. Goto SLD Data Supplier Service 3. BTC job interval (default is 720 minutes) 2. Used as LIS (Landscape Information Provider System) 3. SAP_SLD_DATA_COLLECT SAP_SLD_DATA_STARTUP 5. It provides the details of each managed systems like OS. logon groups. 2. Specify the details like SLD Host and Gateway 4. number of instances. Under software Catalog . . To define a third party system we need to define Product and the Software component version. SAVE and Activate / Execute to send the information to SLD. It is also used to import and export the CIM information. client information. Run Visual admin tool 2.Click products SLD is used for the following 1. patch levels. Remedy can be registered as a third party systems. 4. Seibel. 3. Save the settings with interval 720 Minutes. 5. DB. SAP Application. message server etc. It uses SLD_UC RFC connection (Type TCP/IP 'T') REGISTERING JAVA ENGINE 1.

Downloads Tab > SAP Distribution Center >Downloads >Support Patches and Contents .zip contains their own versions Goto SLD Administration and click on details to display the versions. 25-Jul-09 SLD. RFC and the Gateway) But business system is a technical system pointing to a business client. DISTRIBUTED SLD Companies like HP. So it is recommended to have individual SLD for each landscape and communicate each other using data suppliers. 2. P&G.228 6. XI.31 contains 382 Products and 2189 Software components. All the systems to configure as backend for EP. This is used in small mid sized companies where only one landscape is maintained. Coke has their global presence through out the world which maintains multiple landscapes across the world. It is possible to have more business systems from a single technical system. Note: 1. It will be difficult to fetch the information of all the systems using single SLD. 7. It is used to define the system landscape and system domain. CR_CONTENT. SINGLE SLD There will be only one SLD in the landscape which provides the complete information of systems in the landscape. CIMSAP. 8.zip. TYPES OF SLD 1. GE. BI needs to be registered as Technical systems in SLD.4. Used to define business systems (Business systems are associated systems that are used in XI Domain) (Technical system is a system which is pointed to Hostname.

229 >My Company Application Component CIMSAP_CR > Import the file to this folder.ZIP provides the product and software components versions that are released by SAP. export and backup) . Export and Import logs 4. CIMSAP.ZIP. QAS and PRD. ISLAND SLD Companies may require Data security. CR_CONTENT. Production systems and they doesn't want the SLD to be shared between DEV. It will not effect the operation of J2EE Engine. To display the SLD. SLD can be started and stopped using the option Administration. It provides the log settings and filter 2. All the production systems in the landscape uses a different SLD called as ISLAND SLD. It is used for comparison with market place products. SLD Log 1. 3. Used to display the logs of a SLD runtime 3. CIM and CR Content Profile It is used to set various parameters that are required by the SLD (Do not change the parameters during import.

It provides the product and software component information along with systems that are configured on the SLD. Backup: It is used to take the backup of SLD content. Note: ABAP should know which gateway it should be used. System Message: SM069 SM02 Content: Import export backup. TREX server. gateway service.230 Eg: In a standalone J2ee installed reset the Data supplier parameter. Data Supplier: We can configure other SLD's in case if we are defining distributed SLD. . Name Space: Used to define the namespace for developing the objects by default SLD/Active is provided. But we can also import the content that is exported earlier from the same SLD. Adapter Engine. It contains only time stamp to differentiate between backups. Class Browser: It displays the class information of the CIM Model. Integration Repository. Gateway host. Default trace should be false. class name and the time interval. Also used to define associated systems in the XI-Domain. Backup (Copy of SLD Content) Export: It is similar to backup but versions are maintained between exports along with time stamp. Content Maintenance: Used to define the role of systems in the landscape Eg: XI-Domain. Change Logs: Used to display the logs of content change based on user name. Import: Basically this is used to import the content that is delivered by SAP.

e.6C maintenance is expires on Dec 2005 Each SAP Product is supported based 5-1-2 i. Different OS. If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPR3. All of the above can be obtained by using suserid of the other company Maintenance optimizer is introduced to approve the patches related to our landscape.. runtime support.12. R/3 patch levels for homogenous.9999 SAP Supports support packages. 5 Years with normal maintenance fee i. The Hardware doesn't support the current load and users encounter-frequent bottle necks on memory CPU and storage.50 Lakhs + 10 Lakhs ----------. notes. patches. . 19% and 7 Year and 8th Year with additional 2% i. developer keys etc. Eg: R/3 4. 21% + Country Taxes.Heterogeneous. After 3 months it locks the SPAM.e. To get the enhanced features that are provided in the current release. The same OS. DB. It is not possible to refresh database of 4. From JAN 2009 maintenance certificate will be issued for every 3 months. 17% 6 Year with additional 2% i. The product is out of maintenance and support. The upgrade only upgrades data dictionary and repository objects.2 Years The license is valid till 31.6C and below.50 Lakhs 150 Users . SAP upgrade may involves O/S and database upgrade which drastically improves performance on the new hardware. Upgrade never impacts on the DB Size. Different DB but same R/3 version with patch levels. The additional fees are based on total cost + additional users 4. license key.0 vice versa because the complete DD and Repository is different.7 Enterprise edition normal maintenance ends in 2009 100 Users . stacks.231 26-Jul-09 UPGRADE MOTIVATION 1.e.7EE on ECC5. then the version is 4. upgrade.e..

Do not skip any phase in prepare/ modify the logs manually. Decision on Languages 12.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3 then it is an ABAP system on NW7. 9.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3DB then it is JAVA sys on NW7.0 SR3 19. 5. SPDD and SPAU correction needs to be handled. DB upgrades as well plan them accordingly/ separately (OS . Verify the compatibility of OS/DB/SMP/PAM (Product Availability Matrix) 3. DB should not be done at a time) Eg: WinNT Oracle 8i 4.ECC5. Upgrade key from solution manager and upgrade key from master note are required. Download the software from Market place/ SWDC 6.0 SAPSR4 . Upgrade SAPUP. Run the prepare well in advance.another instance. Unicode consumes atleast 40% more than the current system resources. Upgrade may involve OS. 13. Perform Hardware sizing with expected growth of database for next 3 years.6c OS upgrade from NT to 2003/2008 Oracle 8i to 9.232 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAP<SID> it is 4. 15.7EE . 17.0. Define the best strategy for upgrade (Downtime/ Resource) minimised 18. Upgrade should be performed in the sequence of landscape. R/3. 27-Jul-09 . Decision on support packages 10. The upgrade timelines should be calculated on the mock system with production data. TP if required. UPGRADE PLAN 1.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3SHD then it is a shadow instance on NW7. 14. R3TRANS.2. 4.log for the prepare errors. SAPCAR. 16.4 R/3 4. Download upgrade notes and known problems 8. Download relevant JRE 7. Download upgrade master/ upgrade technical guide 2. Decision on Add-ons 11. Read the checks.2 to 10.6c to ECC6.

.. CONTROL IN etc...233 20. MAESTRO.server mode. So upgrade server needs to be started to run the upgrade assistant. Prepare prepares the system for upgrade by checking all the pre-requisites and documents in checks. SRM... Development and Technical teams need to certify the upgrade before going live.. Use the following commands to start the server and GUI JAVA -cp<upgrade directory> \ua\ua. REDWOOD. 22.bat to create a directory and extract executables...) All the components are priced based on business suite. On UNIX we may need to create /usr/sap/put with SIDADM as the owner with atleast 10GB of space. VERTEX.0 from below versions 4. Upgrade runs on client .jar NOTE: There is no upgrade to ECC6. Running Prepare Prepare need to be executed and ensure that all the prepare phases are run successfully.PI. Use that list to document the phases and to update the status to management and SAP. A user created in component can access other components with same license key.6c MySAP (CRM.) Accelerated Components (XI. BI. VIRSA. It is used to run before upgrade . SR1 ->SR2 ->SR3 ->EHP1 ->EHP2 ->EHP3 Say for Eg: if a product costs 60 Lakhs 50% discount will be given by the SAP 30 Lakhs but the maintenance cost is calculated on the whole (60L) PREPARE Can run during production operations.. Prepare and upgrade phase list are provided with expected percentage of time.log Mount the upgrade master and execute prepare. Document all the interfaces and 3rd party tools like IFS. 21. SCM.. Background Schedulers like TIDAL.

During initialization it checks for OS.6c to ECC6. Instance number. kernel. DB versions.0 II. Patches. Eg: If profiles (Startup. All the above phases can run individually or can run as a total. DB Versions. upgrade languages. DB upgrade. INPUT PHASE It checks all the pre-requisites and writes into checks. readability of profiles etc.log OS. languages. checks RFC connection using DDIC pwd and the client. Disk space. File system. INITIALISATION PHASE Specify the parameter dir_put (put = \usr\sap\put) put directory is the upgrade directory which hosts exe. Additional Hardware. Default. Profile paths \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile. . checks for enough space in the put directory for import. Instance) are corrupted or not readable the PREPARE fails. It checks for the following OS Versions. batch host (The instance that provides the background process). upgrade exports) From 4. kernel. In the INPUT phase provide the following 1. Mount point of CD's (Upgrade master. Checks the connectivity with the DB. \put directory is an upgrade directory. Host name.234 I. SAP<SID>. log etc.

Customer might have changed the above objects by obtaining SSCR keys (SAP Software Change Registration) or they are upgraded by Note.Checks the Archive directory (ORA-272. programs. During the prepare phase we need to download the upgrade fix FIX. Add-ons in IS_SELECT phase and languages LANG_SELECT. Instance number of shadow system. ORA-255) . kernel directory. conversion. port number. add on conflicts.Free database size and recommends the tablespaces that needs to be extended.235 III. move name tabs and performs main import. Stack etc. 1. function modules etc. Patch. (ORA-1653 & 54) Archieve Issues Ensure that all the prepare modules ran successfully to proceed for the upgrade. .Free extents in the tablespaces which needs to increase (ORA-1631. language compatibility and database issues like table space over flow (ORA-1631 & 32). It performs a test import (DDIC Import) activation. Support Package.Checks the connectivity to the database (ORA . Include support packages in the BIND_PATCH phase. create DB_user for shadow instance. INSTALLATION Provide the following details for upgrade shadow system.SAR 28-Jul-09 PREPARE also checks the following . It checks for unreleased transports. distribution. profiles (\usr\sap\put). It also checks for incomplete imports.The should not be any terminated/ Pending updates . menus. ORA-1632) . IMPORT PHASE It performs extraction of release dependent data and the support package imports.12500) .There should not be any unreleased transport requests SPAD/ SPAU During the upgrade it only changes the SAP standard data structure like tables. Note: \usr\sap\put\log specifies the log files during the upgrade. IV.Checks the space in the upgrade directory . screens. .

stores all the change requests. The SPAD & SPAU changes can be recorded in development system to change requests.log .stores the installation time taken. From service.jar UaServer to bring up the Upgrade (Assistant) Wizard From Menu Start > PREPARE .jar UaServer us> java -cp uagui.sap. domain and the dataelement).7C TO ECC6 SICK SE06 RZ10 System name : Can be find from RZ10 Stms Slicense (HW Key) E:\usr\sap\put\us> java -cp ua. SPAM. Programs RICEF) that is code which is written in ABAP is changed. which can be included in the upgrade of other systems in the landscape. Screens.com > My Profile > Single sign on for SAP Certificate 4. 2. SAINT TABLE E070 UPGRADATION FROM 4. TABLE E070 . 3. Eg: Employee ID is 25 . SAPINST. SDM. TIPS 1.236 During the upgrade it prompts SPDD/ SPAU SPDD: for the data dictionary elements (like table. EMPID 25(INT) is changed into EMPID 50(INT) SPAU: for repository objects like (Reports.

upgrademaster\UMN Windows .R3 Trans] ------Communicates with DB Depends on OS TP Connects to the database using R3TRANS.237 Provide the following or follow the on screen for inputs Host : willsysdell User name : administrator Mount Points . ACCTIT Large size tables COEP 29-Jul-09 [TP . CRT.Lang1 .Provide SAP Components . Add-ons.\upgrade\sap upgrade1\UPG1 .sar Usr\sap\trans\eps\in The standard objects should be corrected within 14days after an upgrade.to Lang6 . In order to apply them to a specific database and O/S TP. . DB Exports are OS/ DB independent. After 14 days we need to obtain SCCR Keys Upgrade Process: We need to choose the strategy either downtime minimised or resource minimised. R3TRANS should be capable of communicate with DB Libraries and update database.to UPG16 (TO car the sar files) (Support Packs) Sapcar -xvf *. R3Trans is capable of converting the DB specific data into OS independent/ DB independent cofiles/ datafiles That is why support packages. Notes.Kernel . Downtime minimised provides high availability to the system which is going to upgrade.

RDDNEWPP jobs should be scheduled in client 000 using user DDIC (DDIC should not be locked) RDD* Jobs are scheduled in the background which reads content from TRBAT and TRJOB and import into DB R3load .tsk. *.pfl To read parameters from tp_domain_<SID>.Data P . Note: No business data @ OS level or file system.cmd *. RDDIMPDP. Structure .Index View. > tp connect DEV pf=E:\usr\sap\trans\bin\to_domain_dev.Table D .bak T .I/E *.data *.log *.str These all will be in the Task File STR files are provided by SAP (We can create STR Files during the exports) 1.238 TP.tpl *.tsk *.Primary Key I . R3TRANS should be compatible with DB specific libraries to connect to DB for import.ctf (Create Task File) R3load .pfl TP initializes R3TRANS and writes all the jobs in TRBAT and TRJOB.toc *.

239 2. DB export method Use option 4 only heterogeneous environment/ Unicode conversion Export the structure Import the structure Perform table splitting The above two options are used to handle large databases to perform parallel export and import. DB Export . Experienced OS/ DB Consultants can trigger all the above at OS level using R/3 load. However DB export will be performed by option 3 only.. Splitter 3. DB Export with DB specific method 4. Programs/ Reports SE38 Domain Data element Tables Function Module Screens Menus SE11 SE37 SE51 SE41 .. DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE DI JDI is used to provide development of JAVA programs DI is an usage type which provides JAVA transport Management system (Change Management System) to move the developed objects in the landscape.

Data Inconsistency (In BI. 5. ABAP requires both compiler and Interpreter (F3 & F8) Save. R3Trans to move the objects from DB to OS specific and vice versa. Activate and Execute. TRDIR. ABAP uses client mechanism to differentiate customizing . Refer Table TADIR. Data files. 8. 3.240 Forms Transaction SE71 (Medruck) SE91 Note: Transaction is a logical entity (internally contains Programs/ Reports) [Prog/ Report] in pfcg role Cofiles. ABAP development resides in the Database. Change request of type Work Bench 2. 4. ABAP requires SE38 transaction to perform development.Table entries 30-Jul-09 1. Customizing . ABAP Objects are consistent because the objects are locked by a developer while modifying the code while others can only display. PI there is a locking system) 7. DD02L. 6. Transport Requests will be in our scope 1. ABAP Development is Central where as JAVA Development is Local. TFDIR. 2. ABAP uses TP. No specific format for ABAP Programs. ABAP development consists of the same program with different versions from developers.

It is an usage type provided by SAP to develop programs in-house for meeting the specific requirement. ABAP uses transport routes/ Transport layers to transport the objects. JAVA is Case Sensitive but ABAP is not case sensitive. compile and execute program 4. JAVA can be programmed using any of the editor at file system.awt.Change management system 6. Eg JAVA program import java.net.* Import java. 2. 10. INSTALLATION .* Public static void Main() JDI . JAVA uses the entire system to differentiate customizing because JAVA does not have client customization. JAVA uses SDM to move the object to the landscape 5. JAVA uses tracks to transport the objects. ABAP uses transport routes/ transport layers to transport the object. 7. JAVA objects are defined based on product/ SWCV version (Software Component Version) that are defined in SLD. 3. 10.241 9. javac and java to save.JAVA DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE. JAVA uses CMS and four system landscape (At least 3 system landscape) CMS . 1. JAVA development resides at file system. ABAP objects are defined in the custom name space 'Y' and 'Z'. JAVA 1. JAVA Programs are executable provided we have JRE 8. 9. JAVA requires JRE.*. *. ABAP are not executable outside the SAP environment.

Select NWA to perform post installation activities.242 Select the usage type DI during the installation POST INSTALLATION. Provide the passwords for the following system. Version histories and concurrent work on resources. Consider the diagram . users require certain roles to work on CMS. NWDI_CMSADM NWDI_DEV NWDI_ADM These users are created during post installation to work on DI. http://<hostname>:50000/nwa form tab Deploy and change option select scenario as DI from the Drop down. NWDI Administrator JDI Administrator NWDI Developer JDI Developer Use url http://<hostname>:50000/devinf devinf : displays design time repository DTR The DTR provides central file and folder based on storage of source code. It enables effective team work among developers distributed over different locations. Execute.

If any changes required it will be sent back to individual systems which is considered as Development.243 Each Individual system is a DEV System but development is not done in the DEV system. NWDS (Netweaver Developer Studio) In order to work with DI we need to be NWDI Administrator http://<hostname>:50000/devinf Click on Change Management service Configure check in so that the objects are checked in using the default directory. (usr\sap\trans : usr\sap\jtrans) Configure Check in > NEW Click on Landscape configuration to configure the JAVA system Landscape. Click on DOMAIN DATA and specify the following - .

Note:/ Mechanism: The Transport Mechanism performed by using SDM. Developer uses developer studio to develop the programs upon successful completion they will check in the objects into \usr\sap\trans of domain. Track is mandatory to move the objects. Click on the Tab Runtime Systems Check the following options : Development. In ABAP engine the objects are assigned to development class and development class is . SAVE and Click on SAVE & RESTORE TRACK Track is used to define the path to move the objects. Test and Production That needs to be configured as a system in the landscape Provide the details of each system as follows Specify SDM HOSTNAME SDM PORT NUM SDM PASSWORD J2EE Engine URL J2EE Engine User ********** http://willsys28:50000 DEV DEV DEB DEV DEMO http://willsys28:50000 NWDI_CMSADM ********* d:/usr/sap/trans/eps/incmswillsys28DEV : J2ee_Admin Select 4 systems in the landscape DEV. CONS. HOST. PORT NUMBER 50018 & PWD. (Generally domain will be development).244 CMS Name CMS Desc CMS Url CMS User PWD Transport DIR Now under Domain Domain ID Domain Name Domain Desc Ext Servers SLD Url Save the domain. TEST. The objects are checked into DEV system using the credentials that are provided in runtime systems. Consolidation. PROD.

Goto CMS define TRACK 3.Repository type DTR . In JAVA TRACK is equal to DEV CLASS and LAYER 1.Design time repository Design time repository is used to maintain the versions.Track ID DEMO . Define software CV/ Product 2.245 assigned to a transport layer and layer is assigned to a transport group and subsequently assign the route to a system to define the landscape.Track Desc DEMO Design time Rep URL : http://willsys28:50000/dtr Comp build server URL: http://<hostname>:50000 SAVE DTR .Track Name DEMO . Include SWCV defined in SLD Defining a Track From CMS Click on the Tab TRACK DATA Click on NEW Provide . : .

SAP components are installed on code page 1100 which supports English.246 CBS . Define the Domain 3.Component build service used to build the components Note: This DI Configuration is only required when there is a need to develop the products. Eg.e. Include the run time systems 5. If the customer is not satisfied with the Single code page then we need to install additional code pages i. MDMP has various issues during upgrade and migration. transport mechanism to transport the objects. German & Other languages. Define users and assign roles so that users can work on CMS Installation of NW Studio on developer PC's Note: Even though DI is introduced for transporting the objects EP.STMS EP . Deploy service is provided in Visual Admin Tool to import the small objects. Japanese and Korean etc using the same code page. BI has their own transport package. BI .Export Objects and Import Objects BI-JAVA . As a new consultant we need to perform the following. It is not possible to access the system in Chinese. XI.is deployed on portal so it uses transport of the packages. all the products will be released on Unicode only. software components and programs specific to industry requirements. Move the objects between systems either manually or using DI 6.e.Transport of Packages (Export/ Import) PI/XI . MDMP . Define the tracks 4. blended code page. There are around 3000 MDMP logon/ system_lang = EN . Define Product and software component version in SLD 2.Multi display multiple processing. SAP from 2007 onwards implemented Unicode i. selected.e. 31-Jul-09 SINGLE CODE PAGE Each database supports various languages depending upon the code page i. 1.

Unicode to Non-Unicode is not possible Blended code page . While exporting select Unicode(Little Endian or Big Endian) 4. It runs for hours 1. 3. Big Endian stores the most significant byte in the smallest address. Pooled and Cluster Tables) depending upon the size of the database.Multiple language with different code page. LINUX Big Endian is used by HPUNIX. Note: Without executing SPUMG Unicode conversion is not possible. Unicode is installed on code page 4101 or 4102 which depends on Endian [Little Or Big]. It may take hours. Export the database using Non-Unicode kernel. * NUC to UC happens only during the Exports. Execute the transaction SPUMG and schedule the consistency check for all the tables (Transparent. Executes the background jobs from the Unicode conversion 2. Install the system with option target system using Unicode kernel.247 Unicode supports all the languages because if it is installed on double byte code depending upon the language. Little Endian is used by Windows NT. . Pre-Requisites for Unicode From market place/Unicode (Unicode Media library) SPUMG: It checks for all the tables that needs to be converted to Unicode. Zcsa/ system_language Abap/buffersize Unicode consumes 40% resources than a Non-Unicode system. Specify the parallel process at least to increase speed depending upon the available resources. SUN SOLARIS and ISERIES. 5. SAP Note: 648016 Conversion to Unicode. AIX.

File Server. SRM. It provides an interface to communicate with all the applications . WebTop i. XI. functional consultants and end users. Single interface with back end connectivity. role based single point of access. in the specific language to all the applications. SRM etc. File Browser.248 01-Aug-09 Current Environment Problem 1. How to resolve? 1. 4. single point of access to applications. 4. language specific. Web Server. browser used to communicate without any GUI Installation. 2. Oracle Apps. People centric. 1. SCM. Customer (SONY) should provide the feasibility to work from home for developers. Too many passwords to remember. IE etc. web based. Lock of Interface and Integration. CRM. It provides the following. Web browser 2. Portal is meant for . Mailbox. Customers having applications like Microsoft. SAP Introduced Enterprise Portal to overcome the above issues. Exchange Server. user based. Customer needs multiple GUI to communicate with each of them. Too many applications like ERP. Too many GUI's (Outlook Client. SAP GUI. technical consultants. Customer needs the people centric. SAP ERP.to make effective use of JRE. 2. single point of access to all the applications.e. role based. Single point of access to all the applications.) 3. Domino Server. Siebel. Motivation of Portal Portal provides a role based. 3. Single sign on to communicate with all the applications. 5. Less Productivity. Web server GUI.

EP provides rooms. SAP provides administration environment for Monitoring. It provides 20 Languages by default. However authorizations needs to be maintained in the back end systems. It resides on the proven JAVA Engine there by using all the features of JAVA. managers. 11. EP provides content management which is the part of Knowledge Management to access the documents from various repositories. screens and desktops can be customized. 16. EP provides Interactive environment where logos. It provides self registration features for the guests. 12. chatting engine. 14. over the web. SAP provides development environment using visual composer which is a web based tool. 4. 15. fonts and colors etc. 8. 9. ABAP engine user can use EP without any license. It provides user friendly navigational features. . announcements' etc. 17. Transportation etc. No GUI is required (Browser serves the purpose) 5. FAQ's. vendors. Single sign on is configured to communicate with all applications. history of navigation. quick poll.249 3. It provides personalization to select our own themes. User management. 13. Administration. favorites etc. user forums. EP Provides collaborative environment where employees. SAP provides predefined content in the name of business packages which can be deployed by using JSPM. Its License cost is around 1/5th of the ABAP license cost and cost depends upon negotiation. others customers communicate over the web. 10. SSO provides only authentication (Single Sign on) 6. suppliers. 7. banners. news.

User creates 8 POs per day. ABAP Users 1. High users 4800 to 144000 Dialogue steps / 40 hrs 480 dialogue steps = 40 * 60 * 60 seconds Each DS = 40*60*60/ 480 = 300 seconds Assuming each PO high volume consumes 12 dialogue steps. Low users Users are segregated based on the answer time between pages. Dialogue steps 1. Logging in . But in general PO is created with 8 DS 96/8 = 12 PO's per day. Users are categorized into 3 types 1.250 INSTALLATION Similar to JAVA Engine we need BI functionality is required over web then Include BI-JAVA usage type.One dialogue step 3. Medium users 480-4800 Dialogue steps/ 40 Hrs 3. High Users (concurrent users) 2.e. Issuing SU01 Tcode . Medium Users 3. 120 PO's per day .One dialogue step 2. Low users 0-480 dialogue steps/ 40 hrs 2. Selecting field . HARDWARE SIZING Sizing is an activity that is calculated over web using sizing tool provided by SAP. Medium Users Each DS = 40 *60*60/4800 = 30 Seconds I. It is used to calculate the hardware resources that are required by the selected application based on number of users.One dialogue step *ST03 Work load analysis We can find number of dialogue steps 2.

Specify the component (Usage type BI. Storage Capacity 1000 GB 3. Specify the customer number 2. Country Name 4. Memory and Storage 2.e. high 7. RAID. Cytrix. Specify the users low. SUN has their own measurements for CPU calculation. Platform/ Hardware details like OS DB. Memory . medium. Celeron and ) each processor has their own unit. Low Users Medium Users High Users Consumes 600 Seconds Consumes around 180 Seconds Consumes 30 Seconds. Network Connectivity. User SAP Proprietary tool (QUICK sizer) 02-Aug-09 SIZING Tools 1. SAP's is an unit to measure CPU. CPUS specific to Hardware. for every 2000 sales document that are created 100SAPS/ Hr Sales order contains more dialogue steps. XI) 6. HP. Hard ware details like CPU. STANDBY Server. Name the project 3.32000 MB 4. 800 SAP's are generated by I Series CPU (IBM) similarly DELL. Vendors to calculate the number of CPU's required. High Users Each DS = 40 * 60*60/ 14400 = 10 Seconds 360 PO's per day JAVA SIZING As it is web based the time taken to flip between pages is considered. CLUSTER. CPU could not arrive as a direct measurable unit like memory and Hard Disk which is independent of the Hardware vendor. SAP S is an understandable unit of hardware.251 3. Band width etc. Backup mirroring. Vendor (Pentium. maid. Cust info like contact no. EP. Save and calculate the result Results provide the following 1. . 5. CPU systems of SAP (SAP APP) benchmark for performing standard It is calculated based on SD Module i.

Storage size should be net storage/ not gross storage. you need to 1.252 Ordering the Hardware Do not order the sizing output directly. Example. A company buys 10 HDD of 160GB Total 10 * 160 = 1600 (consider only 1400) Remaining will be for format etc. 2. Database growth for the next three years 3. DUMPS and other software (One disk each) d) RAID one disk for parity (Hot swappable drive) 160 * 6 = 960 * 90/100 = 850 GB (NET STORAGE) . a) Space is reserved for firmware (10% of the disk) b) OS mirroring and Log Mirroring (One disk each) c) SWAP. Calculate the OS. DB and other applications utilization.

CRM. Front end customization can be performed based on requirement. Paging. KM repository & CM repository (Stores in the Portal) 3. MI and SLD. BI_BASIS We can view these from System > Status POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES 1. The deployed business packages contains roles. EP is an application that resides in JAVA Engine. 4.It is a platform and we need to have an application installed on it. PI. Note: The purpose of JAVA standalone . 3. Knowledge Management and Collaboration. . If the component is SAP-APPL then its an ERP Component BPP-CRM CRM Component BICONT BI Component ABAP. The collaboration and KM features are available which needs activation/ enablement for access. There is no single role which provide access to the entire content. CPU and memory are major bottle necks on the portal. Calculate the number of interfaces 2. Most of the EP content is available through roles 5. UME provides portal roles to access the EP content. EP by default cannot contain any business transactions. SRM and SCM) (Memory required at CPU Level) In Principle add 30-40% more the net calculation while calculating sizing for portal 1. XI. 2. EP consists of portal. SAP_BW. The business packages need to be deployed to communicate with backend systems. BIW. It does not have any specific steps in NWA like BI. webdynpro connections which needs to be configured.253 Note: Consider the number of interfaces on the system (Job Scheduler. BASIS. 7. 6. Mail Server. 8. SMS.

Memory Usage Memory concept is as same as JAVA stack. Header Area 2. JSPM. NWA Tool for monitoring. EPCore.) Portal User Management JAVA UME is used for user management. RTC Real time Collaboration. VA tool. Content Area 3. Content Management. Collaboration. The portal desktop elements are the following 1. the same process is applicable startsap stopsap Portal logs (Config tool. Navigational Elements 1.) http://<hostname>:50000/irj (integrated run time java) PORTAL DESKTOP/ HOME PAGE SAP provides default desktop for the portal which can be customized. Telnet tool.254 9. Portal Security Portal roles are available to access the portal content. EP. SDM. KM. Visual Composer. Portal is accessed by using URL http://<hostname>:50000/irj 03-Aug-09 Starting and stopping EP As portal is installed on JAVA Engine. Header Area a) Mast Head . Visual composer for development etc. Portal utilizes the J2EE engine runtime along with deployed portal applications (BI.

It contains collaboration. SAP provides various themes to customize the desktops. salutation can be customized. work. c) Top level navigation The third and fourth strip on the page TLN is a role based and tab strips are displayed based on assigned roles. Third strip contains the header and fourth strip contains detailed actions under that role. It provides an option to save the screen as favorite. SAP best practices provides 3 Three themes 1. home. team documents and portal information on the fourth strip. BROWN 3.255 It is the first strip on the page. b) Tool Area It is the second strip on the page. history of pages navigated and flexibility to move forward and back. SAP also provides theme editor to create and edit the themes. Eg: Home ----. Navigational Elements It is used to provide various navigational elements. Save favorites detailed navigation. We can change banner and logo. banner. logoff. PORTAL DESKTOP It is default desktop that is provided by SAP. They resides on the LHS to the page. personalize and SAP logo. BLUE . search and advanced search collaboration need to be enabled. 2. RED 2.Third strip contains company. Content Area It is used to display the content and it will be around 2/3 of the page. LOGO. 3. d) Page title bar The fifth strip on the page and it contains page title. Personalization is only available when EU_ROLE is assigned. It contains salutation.

save it as a new theme and customize accordingly. -----TASKS .. common folders and Taxonomy (displaying in a structure) 4. export and edit themes Goto Themes import > specify the path and import the theme into the portal.. import. MSS and XMII configuration (Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence) Defining roles and User assignment Enabling various functionality of portal like (Personalization.. Developing pages internally for training. Customization 3. MSS and XMII Customize portal. Administration . Content Manager ..Knowledge management from various repositories. Change the theme according to the requirement.Screen desktop. logos... collaboration. RTC. . ABAP engine) Installation and Post Installation Activities/ -----Install Portal Apply patches. PORTAL ACTIVITIES 1.Single sign on Deploying business packages Patches Establishing connectivity to backend systems. personal. branching and Images etc. banners.. Public. content management etc) Working with user management (LDAP. Goto Theme Editor and select a theme .256 Goto System Administration > Portal display > Theme Editor Theme editor provides options to create. 2.Developing the pages for E-Filing Tax returns. Update etc. Development . Dealer management.. login screen. 18 patch Deploy ESS. ESS.

Collaboration.e. TEP10_2) MDM: SAP introduced MySAPBusiness suite 7.0. material master records in various systems and synchronization is becoming difficult.0 (SCM7. JAVA Engine 2. 04-Aug-09 SAP Netweaver certification books (TEP10_1. one Master data for all the systems Note: Web dispatcher identifies the least loaded ICM when going for BSP .0) All these components need to be maintained customer. KM 3. SR3 EHP4. CRM7. Motivation for portal. vendor. supplier. ECC6. SAP provides MDM where the synchronization starts from MDM to all the systems i. SRM7.0.0. Netweaver 04 Installation (based on 640) 1.257 List down the JAVA Activities List down the SOLMAN Activities What is the purpose of DI? Explain the process of upgrade (326) include prepare Explain HW sizing Explain the functionality of Market place with respect to customer environment.

Rough ---------Refer ST07 UME . User Groups Roles Tcode: SUGR Authorization > transfer > change Authorization of Group check S_USR_GRP --------------------------------05-Aug-09 .User Management Engine Note: If SAP * is enabled we cannot login with the other users.258 Note: Central Services Instance Central Instance Dialogue Instance --------.

Under "Personalization Tab" Portal Theme: It is used to change your portal desktop.open . Work Protect Mode: This option is used to set the work protect mode i. contact info. On a standalone JAVA change password is also provided.e. TCODE: SU2. SU3 authorizations required for that user. address and organizational elements. Enabling Collaboration Option Http://<hostname>:50000/irj Click on content administration> Portal Content > Portal users > Standard Portal Users > Open default Frame work page Check . User Mapping: (Remote Iviews) While accessing the data remote systems specify the userid authorized in the backend systems. Due to the performance issue on the web the personalization is restricted to change the password and contact info only. Every user needs EU_ROLE (Standard End user role) which can be customized according to the requirements. Add the role to the end user group and assign the group to every user.259 ENTERPRISE PORTAL PERSONALIZATION It is used to setup the portal desktop along with specified language. themes and manage personal data. when a user partially entered data in the screen while navigating away from that screen it should prompt whether to save changes or open up a new window or discard the changes or save the data.objects Select tool area > open + Enable collaboration launch pad (CLP) Set YES . Eg: Users uses standard HR user to get the HR related information from the back end. Fonts. User Profile: It is used to change the general information like email-id.Tool Area .

Unlock the object System Administration.SAP with dedicated application server/ load balancing when more than one instance is available. Select the template . Click on the Tab System Administration . create tasks.e.Specify the system name: ERP . 5.i.willsys. assign the tasks.System Configuration . Select the folder > Rt click> and select create "New system from template (new system from portal achieve) par file.saperp.net) . 3. logon load balancing is configured in SMLG/ RFC server groups configured in RZ12.Portal content > Rt Click > Create new folder to identify our objects (Your custom portal content).System ID Prefix EWD (System should have atleast two dots like com.com or EWD. 4. Instant messages. It is also used to move the objects based on the folder name. . 06-Aug-09 DEFINING SYSTEM Each back end system needs to be defined as a system in the Portal. Home > Documents Collaboration is used to provide various options to communicate with employees. Login to the Portal 2.260 Enable RTC Real Time Collaboration Set YES SAVE.System ID: EWD .System Landscape . monitor the tasks etc. Select SAP with dedicated application --> Next . sending email. System Definition 1.

Select the language .Open the object for describing the backend details and specify application host [Willerpdev] gateway host [ ] gateway services [ ] sapgw00 SAP Client Client 800 Port 3200 System type SAP_R3 Save. The real system will be customer system. SAP_CRM Note: Supply chain management (SCM).261 6.Click on next . .Specify description [ ERP system as a backend system ] .Finish SAVE . When the content is defined like ESS and MSS they will use alias name which intern points to the real system. User] [Save] Display System Alias Add Alias name: BAS Save . THERE ARE 3 SYSTEM TYPES 1. SRM can be considered as R3 systems Now > GOTO property type : [ User Management] Select type : [SAP Log on Client] Logon Method: UIDPW Mapping type [ Admin. SAP_R3 2.EN . SAP_BW 3.Close System aliases is a name that will be used while defining the portal content objects. The alias name will be unique through out the landscape. Aliases is a pointer to the backend system.

net Select the GUI type > Next> select the system ERP . It is displayed in the content area.e. Iviews are pointed to an alias > Rt click the Iviews and preview.. PCD is the portal content database which are in the directory structure i. Iviews are created as an copy or as an delta link. Portal content contains the following iviews.Monitor Specify the prefix Custom mon... url etc.. FINISH.saperp. webgui. Iviews are defined from a portal template when we copy from an iview it is completely copied pointing to the template. Using delta link the properties are inherited from linked iview and master (template) iview. ---Portal + ERP ESS. MSS configuration ---07-Aug-09 PORTAL CONTENT DIRECTORY . The properties are inherited from the Master template only... not from the copied iview.. Iview can be SAP transaction. pages. Portal content is built using templates and delta links. specify the iview name For Eg: Name ..262 Defining the portal Content Portal content provides the data that needs to be displayed over the portal. worksets and roles GOTO > Content administration Portal Content Select the folder that is created above > Rt click the folder to create PCD objects. Browse > Select Folder > Rt Click >Create > New Iview.. Select Iview template. portal content directory. layouts. IVIEW: It provides an internet view to the content.

System Administration> System Configuration > System Landscape Select the System Landscape > Right hand side corner click to add to favorites. worksets and roles. Select the iview and paste same. PCD contains folders. 1. Once you add it refresh it till you get in under portal favorites. role based and secure interactive content. so you need to create alias one again. * Portal provides user based. SAP also recommends to use the predefined prefix to identify the objects uniquely. ADD SYSTEM LANDSCAPE TO FAVORITES. There are locate name prefix which is displayed in Quick Info. Goto User Admin Tab > Identity Management > Add Identity Search name: ABAP J2ee_Admin Hit modify Goto User Mapping for system access > System : Your Back End System Eg: NW6 Userid : Superuser Passwd: Admin123 Note: When you copy the system to the FOLDER the alias will not be copied. (Portal Content Database/ Directory). DEFINING THE CONTENT. 3. Now Goto > System Administrator > Support > Sap Application > Select type > Transaction > RUN Now Goto your Folder > select RC > IVIEW > (.) Transaction Iview > Next > Select the system [ALIAS] > FINISH > select the iview and preview. Create System 2. pages. views.263 Enterprise port contains predefined content that is available through PCD. Provide an user mapping ID in user admin to access the content without userid and password. Goto > Content Admin > Portal Content > Select the folder and create the respective content. Copy copies the content without any references. .

Page define the layout. PAGE : Select the Folder > RC > page > give the details > Next (. User JSPM to deploy . (BP . Copy it into usr\sap\trans\eps\in 3. Download the content from Market Place 2. role defines a group of activity and mostly a position in a company. users to implement in the landscape with high productivity. 1.) Default page > Next > light : 2 Columns > ADD > T-Layout > Next > Finish. documentation. > Give the path > Select Import. Delta link also copies but with reference & inheritance. DEPLOYING ESS/MSS AND XMII 1. (. From Client 2. Importing Packages. It provides two options. Server which reads from directory D:\usr\sap\nw\sys\global\pcd\import.) Role needs to be assigned to the user. roles. Now Goto > Identity Management > Find out the user J2EE_Admin > Goto > User Mapping for source system tab > Give the mapping users & password > Mapping user id sapuser -.Enterprise Portal Archive. After Import > Goto Content Administration > Portal Content > Content provided by SAP > Specialist > Here you will find all the roles and iviews.264 4. BP Best Practices provide predefined content. Select the Iview > RC > Add to page.Back end system user and Password. Now Goto > User Administration > Identity Management > Select the user J2EE_ADMIN > modify > Assign role called Finance Manager select Finance manager ADD similarly add material manager. role. worksets. worksets define the activity. 5.Best Practices) System Administration > Transport > Transport of Packages > Import. EPA . Similarly define page. Now Goto > System Configuration > System Landscape > Assign the alias name as SAP_R3_BP > SAVE.

How do you configure them? Explain the ratio between them? 20. Standalone. worksets. What are the various tolls available to work on Portal? 6. What is ESS and MSS and how do you configure them? 16. LDAP. What is webdynpro (JCO Destinations) in portal? 29. What are the factors considering Sizing? 4. 5. What is the difference between config tool and visual admin tool? 7. Jlaunch) 23. ABAP 13. Define the webdynpro connections. What are the post Installation activities for Portal? 5. How do you install Portal? OS and DB? 2. Backend system is recognised only when it is configured in SLD to create JCO. How security is controlled in Portal? 26. log. What is the significance of NWA Tool? 30. How did you configure UME in the portal? Explain with steps? Expected user store in Visual Admin. Check the dependencies before deployment. What is portal content views. roles. What is SDM & JSPM and explain the difference between them? Which one of them are consistent and why? 10. What is the significance of BP/ 12.265 4. single sign on et. 6. What are the various patches that you have deployed? 11. server. Name the significance of Services and Managers? Explain some of them? 8. What is meant by personalization? 15. What is the significance of the portal number. Explain Portal branding techniques (Logo Banner etc) 24. What is the significance of SLD in Portal? 28. groups etc. Config Tool. How do you transport packages (Export and Import) in portal? . dispatcher. What are the various mechanisms for fine tuning portal? 17. What is the significance of memory in JVM. boot strap. CON. My Portal could not be started? How do you start and where do you start from? What are the developer traces? 22. How the user request is handled in portal when compared to ABAP request? 9. How they are calculated? 19. 25. Explain the significance of JAVA startup (Jcontrol.) 21. How did you perform Sizing? 3. What is meant by system alias and how do you create systems in portal? 27. Bootstrap. What is the difference between Knowledge Management & Collaboration? 14. pages. Shell Console. Explain the directory structure (VA. (Java Connector) 08-Aug-09 Questions PORTAL 1. What is SSO and how did you configure between ERP & Portal? 18. template. aliases. cluster. global config directory etc.

What is the purpose of Portal? Explain few differences when compared to ERP Engine? A. 09-Aug-09 . page. workset and role. How do you work with Quick Poll. Client : Path Server The extension is *. pages and a workset. components and services to portal users. Role: It is a synonym of a position. Favorites. How do you monitor the portal? What are the various tools available? 35. Forums.Internet View which displays the content. All the above can be assigned as a copy or as a Delta link. To use portal we need only internet explorer where as for ERP we need SAP GUI. What is Visual Composer? Adobe SVG Viewer? Iview . It is recommended to use delta link because inheritance from parent to child exists in Delta link. Role assigner (Include it for a group. Allows us to set authorization permissions on portal objects. Page. It can contain iviews. News. How documents are stored in Portal? How do you create documents? 36. Import and Export: The developed content can be exported to global directory to transport to other systems. 34. Rooms? 37. Note: Iviews cannot contain anything Workset: It is used to display an activity. Page can contain page and iviews. It can contain iview. Goto > Permissions Editor (System Administrator Tab) Select enduser role. Portal lies in JAVA Engine where as ERP lies on ABAP engine. groups or roles.epa (Enterprise Portal Archives) Permissions Editor : Used to assign the permissions to the content. user role) No user gets access to the portal content without defining permissions. SAP Provides transport of packages option to include the content in the package and transport.266 31. How do you configure BI in portal? Explain the steps? 32.Page is a layout to store and display the iview. Roles are assigned to users and groups. How do you configure CRM in the portal? Explain the steps? 33.

PCUI needs to be downloaded from the market place.SDM uses port 50018 and password to deploy the packages.When the BP is deployed the predefined content is also deployed as well. JCO Connections. 3. BP ERP is required to deploy ESS/ MSS 2.02.JAVA SUPPORT PACK MANAGER Used to deploy the patches/ support packages.10 PI. MSS. . 1. 3.0/ NW640 becomes NW7.10 when is it upgraded where as it comes 7. We need to import the package and define the JCO connections. pages. BI are available Eg: XI3. It is discontinued from Version 7. Webdynpros etc. .04 (EHP1. SDM is also used for undeployment which is a great disadvantage/ because of dependencies may not work.01. Deploying Business Packages SAP Provides predefined packages that contains views. Identifying the Patches. JSPM reads from EPS\IN where as SDM needs to be feeded with the path ESR . worksets.start JSPM using go. ESS. . PCUI (People Centric user interface) need to be deployed to get the interface in the Portal.On 7. .267 SDM . . EHP2. ESS/ MSS package is required to get the portal content.10 and BW3. 4) when EHP is applied.0 to PI7. 7. . 7.Enterprise services repository. 4 associated patches. 7. JSPM .03.10 .5 to BI7.SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT MANAGER It is used to deploy the patches up to version NW7.Deploy the packages.0.Copy the content to usr\sap\trans\eps\in. roles. If DI is not configured then select no NWDI control.select the business packages & select the system in the system landscape if NWDI is in place.10 Note: NW7. user mapping or Single sign on etc. support stacks and business packages.bat .

SSSO cannot provide Authorizations. The user login to the Portal 2. SAP_TRAVEL_METADATA: SAP_TRAVEL. SINGLE SIGN ON The portal is role based. user based.select the JCO connection and Create There are 2 types of JCO's Application Path Connection should be created using dedicated application server. language specific.268 . PWD) and user is issued with a logon ticket. End user etc) Assign the roles to users and ensure that the respective tabs are displayed.Goto Webdynpro (in Content Administration Tab) . . 4. Test the connection Refer to ESS/ MSS documentation and create systems and aliases accordingly. it provides only authentication. Application data should be created using a dedicated Application server. the request should go to the backend ERP system. Eg. web based interface to the users. personalized. Meta Data/ Dictionary Data Connection should be created using logon load balancing. people centric. User sends a request to modify the leave request. Single sign on provides an access to all the back end systems without any password. Define the permissions for the deployed content. 3. The logon ticket is send through the request and gets authenticated on the back end system. The logon ticket is stored as a non-persistent cookie on the browser and valid till the browser is closed or logoff. Mechanism: 1. The user credentials are authenticated (UID. Predefined roles are available only we need to set the permissions (Role owner.

SU01 . The login ticket does not contain passwords. pages and worksets. date of expiry. 4.269 5. It contains userid. CONFIGURING SSO EP to BW 1. Production target/ bonus. JCO. Maintain the portal setting in RSPOR_T_PORTAL in SM30 back end systems 3. like RFC users. 10-Aug-09 DEPLOYING MSS/ ESS Deploy using JSPM: The content deployed contains predefined roles. Create BW system in EP 5. PWD doesn't expires. issues. Execute RSPOSRT. 3. 7. Export the certificate in STRUSTSS02 and import the certificate in EP Key store administration. Dialogue User. authentication scheme. Reference Users . 6. Similarly export from keystore admin and import in STRUSTSS02. Communication User: To transfer the data from one system to another system. SU01 Types of users 1. digital signature. STRUSTSS02 1.Under Role tab. 5. we need to setup single sign on parameters from RZ10.Repopulate info to SLD . JCORFC provider service) 2. login is possible. When the user is absent the reference of the other user will take care. information about the issuing system. Configure SLD RZ70 . 6.To transfer the data or client copy with in the system or local clients in the system 2. In order to setup SSO. 4.To Provide additional rights to the user. System User . Perform user mapping. The backend system will provide authorization to modify the leave request. Create RFC's in BW and EP using program id (SM59. Service User: Is also called as reporting user.

Role assigners and administrators. Role . role or a group. Iviews. Content --------. read only.270 The user from Enterprise portal communicates with backend system using mapped user. read only. .Users ----. Content -------.Group of users .Assigned with roles Note: Even though roles are defined on portal they are used to only to control the access to tabs. Each Portal Content is assigned with a role 2. The mapped user should have a valid employee ID which can be assigned in Transactional HRUser. Regarding Permissions> System Administration > Employee Self Permissions > Permissions Permissions > 1. The Content can be administrated by using a user.to behave as owner. Groups . role assigner. Content Assignment to group -----. end user. role assigner.Role. end user. read only.users ---.to behave as owner. The Data access is controlled in the backend engine.Roles ---. sets. role assigner. pages.Directly to behave as owner. The roles are controlled by assigning them to end user. end user.

271 11-Aug-09 NO CLASS 12-Aug-09 * SU01 users should belongs to ESSGroup .

. Instant Messaging to the users who are logged on to the portal. Contracts Management (Add. Delete. Collaboration provides the following : Work : 1.Webdynpro is deployed through. JSPM or SDM . Edit) 4. 13-Aug-09 What are entry points? Entry points are those in the home page of the portal like public documents.For Knowledge Management JAR files. Create tasks to the subordinates and check the status of update from time to time.272 Collaboration: Enable the collaboration launch pad/ real time collaboration From Content Administration Using default framework page >Open > Rt side select > Enable the collaboration > SAVE Restart the engine Collaboration provides the following . Note: Portal provides runtime for any kind of JAVA or Webdynpro ESS/ MSS . There will be a SMTP server built-in. 2. Folders. Favorites etc. We can check the users availability to send email. Collaboration brings the integration between people and provides all the features which are available with yahoo.Show the status of the users . COLLABORATION It is available by default when the portal is installed. It can also be server as Intranet portal for the larger companies. 3. Google etc. meeting invitation etc.Send email Collaboration means communication between people.

Eg: Science/ Physics. Goto > Content Admin > Collaboration Content > Room Creation (in Right Hand Side) Give the description and details > Hit Next > Add User > Finish. 1. Taxonomies: It is used to organize the date in categories.Quick Poll Administration. Favorites: It is used to store the accessed in links/ documents and provide navigation in one step.273 Navigation: Home > Work > Documents etc. 4. Personal Documents: We can store our personal documents and can display from any part of the world provided access to portal is available. It provides 6 entries. Teams: It is used to collaborate between group of people. Click on NEW > Provide the user logon domain. If you click on physics you need to get statics and dynamics. Group ware transport are used to configure the Microsoft exchange server. Here we can create the documents. 3. Now click on Enter Room http://<hostname>:50000/irj Content Management . The information is fetched and organized by topic. 2. Lotus domino server or any other mail servers. biology. Recently used: It provides the list of documents that are recently accessed. chemistry. . Common Folders: It is used by a team or group to store the documents between them. Documents: Home > Documents SAP provides entry points to store and access the documents. We need to configure rooms before we work with teans. TCODE: SCOT to configure mail server in SAP. SAP also uses TREX to search and classify the information. Note: All collaborative activities using system administration > System Configuration > Collaboration in RHS and click on group ware transport. Http://<hostname>:50000/ user admin Identity Management LDAP Server. 5.

QUICK POLLS etc.Portal Users . customers and business process owners) . Portal ---. Releasing the object locks similar to SM12 approval is required. It is always advised to terminate the user session instead of terminating the locks. JSPM is cumulative/ growing and SPAM is incremental. . employees. Monitoring the user load on the system. We can download from Market place and apply. Portal Thread Weaver is a monitoring toll. (like SD group.User Mapping --.000 portal users will be maintained by using user groups. Modifying the system IP Address (Host Name) in systems if required --. System Administration . It can be enterprise portal archive or webdynpros. User creation. Customization. Eg: A company with 30. Goto Security Provider service and monitor the user sessions and if we require to terminate we can terminate the session upon approval. (Use transport studio to transport objects or SDM to deploy them manually) User management (End user requests from suppliers. defining roles based on content.Users are created in ADS (Active Directory Server) ---> Populate What is the difference between JSPM and SPAM? SPAM is for ABAP and JSPM is for JAVA. MM group etc) Understanding the user and security mechanism. user mapping. .Password rest. assigning to a group and group assignment to users. FAQS.Assign Portal Roles ---.Request Overview. Role Assignment(in portal and backend system). https://<hostname>:50000/irj. Content Manager role to change the NEWS.Monitoring . using JSPM and update Kernel.ensure backend system mapper user (Service User) has relevant authorizations. vendors.274 14-Aug-09 PORTAL DAY TO DAY ACTIVITIES Transportation of Portal Content Objects.Rare Job (Sys Admin ----System Config) Apply support packages/ business packages etc. Webdynpros mainly transported using JDI. JSPM we can jump from 6 to 9 Directly where as in SPAM we need to follow sequence.

SGEN. total number of calls. We need to work with DB and their Patches 3. Each component should not consume more than 2 Seconds on all average.Monitoring . CPU time more than 40 to 60% of the response time then consider CPU is expensive. If the calls are more and response time is high we may consider deploying of a proxy server.200 6 -----. 1.200 As the calls are more Response time will come down Request overview provides the user and component accessed along with CPU time and duration.e. of Calls etc. We need to work with OS and their Patches 2.. DB Statistics. CPU time and No. 8.It is used to display the components that are accessed. We can recreate the index by using BRTOOLS also.10000 2 -----.Content Overview Identify the component which consumes more gross time..275 Monitoring content overviews . We need to work with JVM and their Patches 4. ST04 > DB Buffer init ratio DB02> Missing index. System Administration .. It is used to identify the expensive users at that point of time. We need to work with Backend systems.2000 3 -----. 1------. We can display the content based on search criteria like duration. i. Missing Index and buffers are small. Server Procurements is not as per Hardware Sizing .2000 4 -----. User uses only CPU and Memory of the portal to get the content displayed. it is running expensive Iviews (Embedded Iviews). Request. We need to work with Cache Note: Tune Performance of Enterprise Portal .. Average response time. Component. Request summary is used to identify the CPU time.1000 5 -----. Fine Tuning the Portal. Userid etc.Search in Google.. find out the missing index and recreate. It contains time because the database engine is a backend system. We need to work with Iviews 7. 6. We need to work with Browser IE/ Mozilla Patches 5..

15-Aug-09 BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE/ BUSINESS WAREHOUSE / BUSINESS INFORMATION WARE HOUSING Versions 3.1 3. Web Broadcasting 5. BI is used to run those reports with out effecting the performance. 2.e. User Submit the request.1C are the Basis versions . Configure Thread Manager in Config Tool. Threads min is 500 and Max is 10. Roles etc. What does BI do? . Business Cockpit (In BI7) New 6.. ECC/ ERP system is consuming more time to run the background jobs.. 3. So. 4.0 3.(In Netweaver 7. Archiving system (Date from legacy systems is achieved into BI Systems. Eg. Line Charts and graphical representation . 1. Graphical Representation with help of BO (Business Objects). Reporting system to run the heavy background jobs.. Request is handled by dispatcher and assigns to Thread Manager 4. SAP Provides BI_CONT (BI Content) which contains predefined info cubes. When ABAP is installed (SAP-ABAP. Analytical Reports 2. SAP_BASIS. 7.276 9.0 It became a part of architecture with Information Integration) Motivation 1. Never exceed 80 to 85% of CPU load for extended period of time on ABAP 70% 10. Server process assigns the request to Application Thread Manager So we have enough threads to process the user request. Pie diagrams.000 as per the Industry standards. Requests are handled by server socket queue of http provider services. SAP_BW) comes by default. 8. Thread managers are used to serve the user requests. Bar Charts. Compare the date that is available in market DUN & BRAND street to define the competitive reports. Thread Manager assigns the request to server process 5. Dash Boards etc. BIW From WEBAS 640 it is by default available with the Platform i. Decision Making System 3.

2. Initialize RSA1 to replicate and activate the BI System. XCelsius can also be used to fetch the reports from BI system.specify the field MANDT = <CLIENT> SE11 . *. BI Communicates with various backend systems (ERP. Normalization is a process of splitting up the larger tables into small tables upto sixth normal form to have the granular information and establishing the key relationship between tables. Define logical system to client (BI uses ALE Mechanism to transfer data from ERP to BI) so the communication happens between logical systems only.txt.BWMANDT = 1 save. CRM etc) and fetch the data into FACT and Dimension Tables. The data can be a master data with transaction data The report fetches data from various data sources so more memory and more BTC work process are required. Front end can be BEX or an Enterprise portal. 5.csv. It becomes intelligent by deploying the business content through SAINT. Installation of BI System 1. If BI Portal along with webdynpro development then select DI as well. Now it supports XML files through PI BI is an Analytical system it is based on OLAP Technology (Online Analytical Processing). Flat files (*. 8. Select the usage type ABAP for a normal BI system. If BI Portal is required then select ABAP-JAVA-BIJAVA-EPCORE-EP 3.xls. The Data is not eligible for fro updates.Change . 7.RSADMINA . 7. Establish connection between ERP and BI system . Download the BI-Cont and deploy through SAINT (SE06. Crystal reports. 4. *.03 (Deploy atleast 703 because upto 702 are out of maintenance) current is 710. Set up the Master client in table RSADMINA --. These tables are used to define various reports as per customer requirements. STMS etc) other wise SAINT wont work.277 BI is an SAP ABAP application system with platform ABAP. Small tables are grouped in to (DeNormalization) Big Tables.goto SE12 Specify the table --. BW User = BW user 6.

> Select -> Download Once downloading copy it to usr\sap\trans\eps\in (It is in .Deploy will be finished. RSA1 > Goto Source systems Select SAP > Create RFC Connection Available destination: DEVCLNT001 SID: DEV Sys No: 00 Users ALEREMOTE. ST03 .BI Content 7. With this we can admin BI System through Portal.com/ SWDC .My SAP Application Components .bat Select business package -> Next > SAP BI/ ADMIN (next) .03 around 500 MB Select download . RSPOR_SETUP is a program (BI and EP) Maintain settings for Integration into SAP EP.Installation & Upgrade .sap software distribution center . BWUSER are created with password provided. 16-Aug-09 --------. Check test and activate the connection.278 9.sap.sca format) Now goto JSPM & initiate go.Add to download basket & Download BIADMIN also from the Market place. RZ20 . Once deployed goto > /irj > User Administration > Identity Management > Find the user > Modify > Assign roles > Search for "BI Administrator" role > Add > SAVE.downloads .downloads . Now Under system administration > Monitoring > you will find Business Intelligence .service. BI ADMIN is a business package provided by SAP BPBI Administration .NO CLASS ----------17-Aug-09 DOWNLOAD BI CONTENT www.

Assign the roles to users in the Enterprise portal. Download the BP[BI ADMINA] from Market place copy it to \usr\sap\trans\eps\in directory Use JSPM to deploy the Business Package [BI ADMIN] BI ADMIN COCKPIT 1. Execute > Setup call to BI Admin cockpit. Now goto> SPRO > SAP IMG Reference SAP Netweaver > Business Intelligence > General BI Settings Setting for Administration Cockpit. SMLT. 3. Standard Job Scheduling (SE36) and DB13 etc. Installation of ABAP System. a backend system in TCode RSA1 8. Download BI Content from Market Place 5. Implement Usage of BIADMIN cockpit.e. Broad Caster can be used over the web. BI-JAVA. STMS. EPCore when EP. Reporting retrieval settings > Overview Integration into Portal. Activate the content by using SAINT 6. Define source system i. We can perform Technical . SR13. JAVA. Installation of ABAP. Easy Administration for Complex BW's Navigation Goto > SPRO Why do we need EP for BI Administration? 1. 2.279 RSC_COl is a background job runs to pump the date to ST03 MONI is the table from here the data will be read by the above Job. For WEB Monitoring using Business Packages 2. Analyzer. 7. Define Master Client in RSADMINA Table. . It is a web based BI Admin Tool introduced in Netweaver 7. 1. 4. Backup. BI Integrated planning that is modeling can be performed over the web. Business Explorer. EP. Click on new entries. 3. SMLG. Modeling & Administration etc. Perform other post installation activities like (SE06.0 2. BI-JAVA functionality is required.

After performing system copy in the landscape we need to change the logical system name. Define SAP_BW as a system and create alias. System Copy in Landscape The above figure shows it is a system copy in the landscape. Note: Don't change logical systems name once they are assigned to client. Define JCO Destinations in webdynpro (Four Connections 2 Metadata and 2 Applications) Goto .. Note: Logical system names are required to change only during system copy... Define the Integration between portal and BI Engine (Reporting Setting) in SPRO Use NWA toll to perform.280 The roles are : BI Administration. To perform this we need to go with BDLS and change LSN RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) is a report specify the steps that needs to be followed to integrate BI with JAVA Engine. BI_JAVA. 18-Aug-09 SARA : Tables and Archiving objects TDM_365_BW : BW Security . /nwa RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) SPRO in BI System Or manually in BI System. BI Intelligence. You cal do it by using NWA ../irj > Content Administration > Webdynpro > Maintain JCO RFC. Instead use BDLS to change the logical system. BI Explorer.. post installation activities.

authorization classes. SU22. S_RS_COMP . If you install Solman we will get all the above components. . development. Now it is RSECADMIN. Info cube Sub object SAP Provided RSSM and RSSMTRACE upto 3. Info Cube.Info Area. user comparison. roles. authorization profiles.e. administration and deployment BI Security is similar to R/3 Security which consists of SU20. Info Provider.5 i. reporting component. BI System & Solution Manager System. favorites.0 Eg: To Create custom authorization object we use SU21 in R/3 where as in BW(BI) we use RSECADMIN. The area that differs is to protect the info objects at field level. activities.is the prefix for all reports.1c version of BW. Qry Owner S_RS_LCUBE . From BW3. SU25 with authorization field. composite roles etc. New Security Features 2.Info Area.In BW3.0 the RSSM.281 BI SECURITY 1. RSSMTRACE. composite profiles.Reporting component. Web tools for modeling. Netweaver onwards the above transaction is obsolete. Solution Manager is a CRM System. menus. user assignments. RSSMQ has been moved to RSECADMIN in Netweaver 7. SU21. authorization objects. S_RS_COMP1 . SAP Provides around 20 authorization objects which are required for reporting administration. . RSR and RS .

.Select the object click on Truck BEX we can transport in this way.Collect them in package and transport -.Info Object .BI Content . SP01. Now Goto > RSECADMIN > Maintain > Create Give the description . SAPDATA2.We can also include authorization object in a Transaction SU24.Click on change authorization tab -> X .give the object which is authorization relevant . Pre-Steps on the target system (The tables/ Data that need to be restored after a system copy) 3.Info Object RSA1 is the TCode which is used to activate the content and replicate the content.. objects . DEFINING CUSTOM AUTHORIZATION Goto RSA1 .. It is also use to define key figures. Goto > RSA1 . We need to provide this to every user. . Note: Every user will have the default tcodes (SU53. SU56. Clean the database (SAPDATA1..Select Info Objects .In the next screen .) ..Goto Business explorer tab Authorization Check relevant.. In RSA1 .Goto Authorization Table . 19-Aug-09 SYSTEM COPY (FOR BI SYSTEM) 1.Transport Connection . Now Goto > PFCG -.. TRANSPORTATION OF OBJECTS In RSA1 define the objects -.do the user comparison.. Save....Save and generate the profile in PFCG and assign the role to the user.Create Zrole .. DSO. It is also use to define the transport connections and editability in the Target systems.Select the grouping .Use Object Changeability tab in RSA1 to ensure that the object can be modified in PRD system.Change .Assign the user . PFCG will defaultly we need to use. Chars.. We have another button Object Changeability with this we can give the object as a edit compatibility.Perform user comparison Goto PFCG .Select the char which is in authorization relevant. Info Cubes.282 In order to protect the reports at object and field level we need to make them authorization relevant in RSA1 where as SU20 in R/3.Add manually . .RC .. Info Objects.Define Role -.Include Authorization object manually or . SU3).. Take the backup f the production system (Source) 2.

.sql (Change the SID and path name of datafiles accordingly) 6. Now the user can access the complete SAP Schema... The Process gets the password and disconnects the session.. Process relogins to the database with user SAPSR3 who owns the complete SAP database.0) on wards SAPSR3 is the owner of the database for ABAP. 4. up to ECC5.e.sql" to setup permissions on the database to create OPS$USERS a. b.) 5.. 5. Up to 4. Remove the entries before "startup nomount" and after "Characteristics WE8DEC' Run Control file on the target system 7. c.e. Restore the database from backup /or physical copy of the datafiles (SAPDATA1. . work process connects to the database as user "OPS$<Hostname>\SIDADM to get SAPSR3's password.. From Netweaver 04S (WebAS 7. When the user log in with userid/ password/ mandt/ language it goes to the table USR02 (Internal security of SAP) to validate users. The OS user is created in the database with prefix OPS$(OS Username). The connection is only possible when .. 6. Run "Oradbusr.. User i. SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = 'OPS$willsys99\NWADM'. Generate control file (Alter database backup control file to trace) A trace file is generated in saptrace directory Rename the file to control. user with prefix OPS$. Mechanism: 1. SQL> select bname from SAPSR3.. 2.USR02.. 4..283 SQL> Select username from DBA_USER. SAPSR3 is the schema user whose password stores in table SAPUSER which is owned by OPS$<hostname>\SIDADM Note: OPS$ mechanism provides a means to connect to the database without any password i. Remote_OS_Authenticate = True 3.0 SAP<SID> is the owner of the database.6c SAPR3 is the owner of the database.. SQL> select count * from dba_table where owner = 'SAPSR3'... SAPSR3DB is for the JAVA system. SAPDATA2..

Or You have different users with different roles and profiles. SQL> Insert into table 'OPS$<hostname>/SIDADM'.com/ecatt ------------------SM35 Create new recording . Change the password & username and .erpgenic. If it is manual we need to change in two tables. [SAVE] .give the record name. Truncate the table RFCDES. Click on Execute F3 In the main screen >> In the toll bar. This is sued to truncate all the RFC connections. DBA_USERS 2. Now goto SM35 you will find all the activities on SU01. ------------------Ensure that R3Trans -d results in 0000 POST ACTIVITIES 1..Give tcode SU01 .Change password . How can you achieve this? This will be achieved from SECATT Tcode.SAPUSER values SQL> Alter user SAPSR3 identified by "New password" When you insert password it is alphanumeric(It will be in the encrypted format after restart) Goto > Tcode SECATT Test [ ] create Description [ ] Component [BC] Question: We have 300 user and every month their password needs to be changed. SAVE Goto that particular SU01.Save. Now go to change mode > click on Pattern www.. 1. Export that data as excel sheet. If not the restore system behaves as a source system and triggers the jobs. Change . SAPUSR TABLE SAP recommends to change the schema user password using BRTOOLS/ SAPDBA.284 Note: If any of the 1-5 fails then R3Trans -d results (0012) snote : 400241 SAPSR3 password resides in two tables.

etc. extended and roll memory sequentially where as dialogue uses roll memory. queries. Pre-Activities SM51 . While client copy in ECC error: FINB_TR_DEST type 3. 2.Transport Group BTCTRNS1 .Logon Load Balancing RZ04 . reports transactions. CDCLS(Cluster Table) we can truncate strictly Backup need to take USR02.Is a report to pause the background jobs BTCTRNS2 SM37 .List of Background Jobs RZ11 . BTC uses Dialogue uses abap/heap_area_nondia where as abap/heap_area_dia . SMQ2.Profiles. SMQ1.All the clients SMLG . If the memory is not sufficient in both the cases the process gets terminated or hangs up. SQL> Insert into "OPS$willsys99\NWDADM". Table . Use 1. Screenshots.Relocation of objects SE01(Relocation of objects) 3. For this we need to create a self RFC. extended and heap memory.TOC (SE01) Transport of copies 2.'ADMIN123'.Operation Modes STMS . SLICENSE.285 SQL> Truncate table SAPSR3.sapuser values < 'SAUSER'. system specific programs. 20-Aug-09 BI MONITORING BI uses batch processes to execute the reports. Alternatively you can set rdisp/ wp_no_btc=0 before you start the system or set the time to rdisp/btctime = 0 (Don't worry as SICK results in error) 3. RFCDES. STMS configuration. Technically batch process uses heap memory.Global Instance SCC4 . DBLS (Used to change logical system names) Client information. Specify the RFC name in FINB_TR_DEST. which consumes more time and resources.RFCDES. Programs .

286 ST03n is used to identify the response time of the users, Transaction of reports and processes. Response time depends upon the data to be fetched, query being used, or the duration of the report. (From Date - To Date) Scheduled: When the jobs are defined the status is scheduled. Released: When the execution time is specified for a defined job then its status is released to execute at a point of time. Ready: When the specified time elapses then the status will be ready. Process Flow 1. BTC jobs are defined in SM36 2. The jobs are saved in table TBTCT, TBTCS...... TBTC* 3. A background job SAPMSSYST which runs periodically for every 60 seconds or the time specified in the parameter rdisp/btctime = 60 Secs. This period job runs in the dialogue mode and collects the jobs and runs them into active mode which are in the ready state. Active: The job is actively running on the system. Finished: The job is successfully completed/ Terminated Cancelled: The job is failed The possible reasons for Job Failure: 1. The memory is not sufficient 2. User authentication/ authorizations/ validity ......... issues 3. The variants are not properly defined. Variant is a selection criteria to provide the inputs runtime without user intervention. 4. The dependent jobs are not completed in the process. 5. Database specific issues related to space during the data extraction from backend system. 6. File system issues when extracting the data from flat files (File corrupted, file not opened, file system permissions are not as per ETL format. CDCLS is the cluster table which is having huge data DB02 - We can find the top 50 Tables. TCodes RRMX - It is used to start the business explorer and analyzer. RSRV - To repair the info objects

287 RSPC - It is used to monitor the process chains and check for the links that are broken. RSA1 - ADW RSPC Variant RSPC Process Log Note: Each BI System has its own process before you start working ensure that you are well aware of the process of DTP, Source System, Process Owner, Critical Jobs and their priority and escalation levels. Capacity Planning: DB02--------- Space Analysis------- Identify top 50 table and record them every week to identify the growth of the table. (It is also used to identify the accidental data growth) ST04 : Buffer Monitoring ST30 : Global Performance Analysis 22-Aug-09

DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUES RFC: Remote function call (SM59) it is used to call the other system using the gateway to fetch or send the information. There are 4 types of RFCs 1. ARFC 2. SRFC 3. TRFC 4. QRFC ARFC : Asynchronous RFC: It is used to communicate between two systems but the source system process may not get the acknowledge from the Target. Some times the data may be lost in transition. The source system process does not bother whether the information is received by the target system. It is similar to a post card. It is not reliable and consistent. SRFC: Synchronous RFC: It is used to communicate with receiving system and wait for acknowledgement. If the acknowledgement is delayed it will go into RFC/ Sleep/ CPIC Mode. It is reliable but the resource gets blocked at the target system. If the target system is not available (Example BTC Process waiting too long in the active state) - All BW Systems uses SRFC.

288 SM58 - To find all the IDOCS TRFC: Transactional RFC : It is an advanced version of ARFC. It is used to communicate with receiving system and if the system is not available it will generate a Transaction ID in SM58. and a background job RSARFCSE runs for every 60 Seconds. It is reliable, gets the acknowledgement and data transmission is consistent. Example: Central User Administration Parent client creates users and send it to child clients. If child client is not available it creates a transaction ID in SM58 and ensures delivery when the child client is available. QRFC: Queued RFC: It is an advanced version of TRFC to ensure the jobs are processed in a queue. To execute QRFC we have a job called QUIN Scheduler - We have SMQ1 (Outbound), SMQ2 , SMQR - Quin Schedulers QRFC generates the process of LUW's in the sequence. When the sequence is mandatory in the data transmission QRFC is recommended. SAP Implemented all the above services to ensure the quality in the data transmission. SAP named it as QoS (Quality of Service). SAP consider SRFC, TRFC and QRFC.

1. SRFC --- BE (Best of Efforts) - With best of efforts it will deliver to Target system. When you find BE it is SRFC. Majorly we are going to use in BI and XI Systems. 2. TRFC -- EO (Exactly once) - It checks exactly once. 3. QRFC - EOIO - Exactly once in Order. ALE: (Application Link Enabling): It is used to transfer two loosely coupled systems (SAP to SAP systems) Eg. BW to CRM; ERP to ERP etc. SALE/ BD64/ BD54 it is used to define the logical systems and sending/ receiving systems. Each system that participates in the data transmission is identified by it's logical system name i.e. SIDCLNTCLIENTNO. Transfer ----------- Exchange -------------- Transmission => Are Same And is recommended to define the RFC's using logical system name to uniquely identify in the landscape. 1. Define the distribution model (In Sale TCode) in BD64 (Change) - Create Model View - Give the tech name - Continue.

289 2. API's Application Programming Interface: It is an interface in BD64 select the model click on ADD API defined based on your application either to send or receive data based on the business it is called as BAPI. (Business API's). The BAPI will be assigned between the sending and receiving system

BAPI contains one or more methods. Methods are similar to function modules to perform certain tasks. EDI: Electronic Data Interchange: It is used to transfer the data between SAP to Non-SAP systems and vice versa. In order to monitor the EDI used TCODE WE05 IDOC: Intermediate Document: It is in the understandable format of both sender and the receiver. Non SAP systems could communicate directly with SAP systems. They required adapters (File Adapter, J2EE Adapter, IDOC Adapter, HTTP Adapter etc) When the supply chain market is growing the necessity of 'E-Commerce' Electronic business EB's) is gaining importance and the vendors, suppliers wants the documents flow electronically with out any paper In order to monitor multiple senders and recipients it will be difficult to use SAP Standard transactions, SAP standard systems and mechanisms. XI/ PI EXCHANGE INFRASTRUCTURE/ PROCESS INTEGRATION It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP and vice versa. It communicates with both sending systems and receiving systems via Intelligent Broker. XI Communicates with out Adapter for the versions based on WEBAS 640 and above i.e. 4.6c is involved then it requires an adapter. SLD : http://<hostname>:50000/SLD


1. Why SLD is mandatory in XI? - SLD is to define technical system (Hostname) & Business system (Client) that are going to participate in Integration . - It is used to define the roles of business systems in the XI domain. - It is used to define the XI Domain - Architectural components need to be defined. Integration Directory is nothing but customization Integration Repository is nothing but Development. 2. How to open the XI home page from ABAP? - By using Tcode SXMB_IFR => To Open the XI Home Page. We have default user PISUPER Password : Master Password. Design means IR Customize means ID config time. 23-Aug-09 XI 2.0 very limited XI20 to XI30 is called as Migration. XI 3.0 very limited based on WEBAS 640 XI30 to PI7.0 called upgrade. PI 7.0 Immediate release on WEBAS 700 which required both ABAP & JAVA Environment. It required both command on ABAP & JAVA Environment. XI is Used to exchange the information between SAP to SAP and NON-SAP systems vice versa.


- XI/PI is an Intelligent broker to communicate with systems using adapter with RFC Mechanism...... (BE, EO and EOIO) - XI/PI has not penetrated into market because ALE, EDI, IDOC, file transfer, Batch inputs, BDC (Batch data transfer communication) are in place. To replace them we need a new server i.e. landscape (DEV, QAS, PRD) environment which is expensive and technology required.. Where as companies are habituated to use TIBCO, ROSETTANET etc. Eg. In India Reliance, Hero Honda is using XI3.0 Xchange Infrastructure 3.0 based on WEBAS 640 Process Integration 7.0 based on WEBAS 700 PI 7.10 based on WEBAS 710 PI 7.10 based on EHP1 WEBAS 710 It requires both environments i.e. ABAP and JAVA. XI Architecture: Integration Builder -------- Integration Server Integration Directory ----- Business Process Engine Integration Repository --- Runtime Work bench Central Adapter Engine. PI is deployed through Integration Repository (IR). - Integration Builder is used to build the objects that are required for Integration (Source and receiving system). It contains two areas IR and ID. - IR is often referred as Design Time (Integration Repository) which is used to create and design the integration objects. NOTE: XI/PI license is based on date transfer like size -- 2GB, 5GB, 10 GB. XI Uses global format (XML Format) Extensible Markup language with the help of SOAP (Simple object access protocol). XML is an industry standard which is in the understandable format (Using meta data (Data about data)) It uses its own tags <address>, <price>, <customer>, <shannu><willsys> - ID (Integration Directory) is referred as config time (Integration directory) which is used to configure the run time objects (Sender, Receiver, Interface, Agreements). - To avoid complex developments SAP Provides predefined XI-Content which can be deployed using Integration Repository. The content provided will be in ZIP format which contains ".TPZ" Extension.

292 Note: 1. How did you deploy XI-Content? Through IR. 2. Architecture of XI? 3. How did you apply patches? Through JSPM 4. How did you transport the objects. Extensions: CAR SAR JAR WAR SCA SDA EPA .ZIP EAR TPZ - Compressed Archive --- Mostly for Patches - SAP Archive -- Mostly for SAP Kernel. - JAVA Archives - Web Archives - SAP Component Archives - Deployable archives software SAP - Enterprise Portal Archives - Zip Files - Enterprise Archives - XI/ PI Content

Tools Visual Admin Tool. Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\admin\go.bat On UNIX ./go (JAVA parameter need to set like environment variable) Config Tool. Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\configtool\configtool.bat SDM Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\SMD\remotegui.bat JSPM Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\jspm\go.bat NWA http://<hostname>:50000/NWA SLD http://<hostname>:50000/SLD Template config Tool.

Adapter User PIDIRUSER . How do you apply kernel? 4. DIR. Difference between SDM and JSPM? 2.293 Usr\sap\sid\sys\global\templateconfig Standalone Log Viewer Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\admin\logviewer\standalone\logviewer Questions IMP 1.Super User PIRWBUSER . REP etc for user name analysis) . (In the above user names take out PI and use the AF.You can find in SU01 -> PI* Press F4 PI_JCO_RFC .RFC User PIAF User .Runtime Workbench user. Difference between config tool & visual admin tool? 3. For XI we have XI Super and PI we have PI User Users in PI . Users created in standalone JAVA & Integrated engine Administrator.Integration Landscape user PISUPER . UME in standalone JAVA & Integrated Engine (JAVA .Integration Server User PILDUSER .message Exchange Profile: http://<hostname>:50000/ exchange profile In order to ensure SOD (Separation of Duty) XI creates users during installation only.ABAP Engine)? EP Url's IR http://<hostname>:50000/irj Useradmin: http://<hostname>:50000/user admin J2EE engine: http://<hostname>:50000 XI Url's IR: http://<hostname>:50000/rep (SXMB_IFR) Tcode ID: http://<hostname>:50000/dir (SXMB_IFR) Tcode RWD: http://<hostname>:50000/rwp MDT: http://<hostname>:50000/MDT .Integration Directory User PIREPUSER .Integration Repository user PIISUSER . J2EE_Admin? 5.

Production Landscape . There are two roles in the XI System 1. Application system which is a sender or receiver 24-Aug-09 PCK: Partner connectivity kit. If the participating system is ABAP a technical system pointed to business system is mandatory.XI3. XI requires both ABAP and JAVA components..0 all the above can be selected during the selection of usage type. JAVA and process integration. XI Landscape XI Usually connects to ERP and SRM There should be at least two systems in the landscape one for DEV and one for PRD. This can be installed at partner landscape.Select ABAP. This is used to communicate with XI/PI to transfer data to SAP systems.0 Install ABAP Instance (Central and Database Instance) Create a client and perform ABAP .0 In PI7. XI Installation 640 .Post Installation Activities Install JAVA as an add-on on that client Install XI_Content Install Adapter Engine PI 7.294 Note: All the system that need to participate in the integration must be registered in SLD along with software component version and products. Integration server to process the messages 2. .

Note: In PI 7. now moved as a part of post installation activities. 25-Aug-09 1. EP.295 XI. 2. POST Installation Activities 1. MANUAL PROCESS. BI maintains their own SLD. Post Installation Activities 1. These can be performed manually or using NWA tool. Earlier these activities are performed during installation. Check all the services are running from Visual admin tool. You can use NWA Tool to perform the post-installation activities automatically.1 it is recommended to use NWA tool only (like creation of Users (SUSERS). . generation of roles and profiles and assignment of roles to users. Note: CPIC_MAX_CON=500 (Environmental Variable) to avoid the error max connections reached.

. .Assign LCR roles to users (P1APPLUSER) 3. Assign user in SZDAPICUST (PIAPPLUSER with LCR Rights with assign password) 6. .sap. Execute transaction SWF_XI_CUSTOMISING to configure the basic settings for XI/ PI . 13. Create RFC connection of type "H" for PMIStore (Process Monitoring Infrastructure) .It is used to populate the monitoring into ABAP Engine.e.xi Note: Deploy service is also used to deploy small applications. 8.296 Com.sap. Use SLD data supplier service to populate information of JAVA engine to SLD Note: 9 & 10 are mandatory for all systems that are going to participate in the integration. Define RFC connections "T" from ABAP engine to JAVA Engine. AI_DIRECTORY_JCOSERVER: Points form integration server to the integration builder.rprof. Time Unit. Note: There will be only one integration server in the XI Domain that is used to process the messages..sap. 12. Assign roles to PISUPER (4 Roles) 7. Senders & Receivers are configured as Application System. Define a business system i.lcr Com.Use the URL: http://<hostname>:8000/sap/bc/spi_gate With user PIRWBUSER & password . RZ70 with the help of RFC "SLD_UC" 10.We can use ABAP/WEB to display the end to end monitoring of a message. 9.remoteprofile Com.Define RFC type "H" INTEGRATOIN_DIRECTORY_HMI to refresh the service in J2EE Engine.sap.aii Com. Assign application role to user group in SLD data Supplier service click on user group icon. Application system integration server. The Program ID corresponds to the entry under for the J2EE Engine (Used to refresh the runtime cache) AI_RUNTIME_JCOSERVER (SLDAPIUSER_<SID>. 4. LCRSAPUSER 14. Number ranges etc. Configure ABAP system to SLD using transaction.It is used to set RFC destination. 2. Define the role of a system in SLD. 11. a technical system with specific client. Define RFC type "A" 5. Define a technical system in SLD & assign the product and software component. Config SLD .

business system. Import the landscape information for custom development. 4.cpp to trigger SAL self registration.Tools .Register Queues (Should say Registration Complete) 17.(Infocube objects) 5. 6.cp .Change Global Configuration data Select the business system roles and save it.XI content should be relevant to the backend engine version ECC6. .297 15. Triggering the self registration of Adapter Engine Deploy comsap.Integrate Repository .So each system that needs to participate in the integration define itself with a system role.Integration Engine Configuration (Change Mode) Menu . Define URN (Uniform Resource Name) Com. Set to integration server. software component.sap to define the objects . If the integration engine is configured as an Integration Server then it is called as XI Engine & other are called as Application system (Senders or Receivers) Similarly as Master system in BI (RSADMINA) SXMB_ADM Configuration .af.Integration server & application systems are defined in SLD itself . 16.0 So to .aii. 18. . Use RFC/ IDOCS to communicate with backend to import the IDOC/ RFC structure to use the sending/ receiving system data structure.tp2 file The XI Content is available in the shipped DVD or download form the Market Place.Unzip the content into . Configuring Integration Server on ABAP Engine . but ABAP engine process the messages flow between them using Integration Server.tpz files .Import Design objects Development. .In principle XI Domain is defined in SLD & associated.Execute transaction SXMB_ADM (Integration Engine Administration) Each ABAP engine is a Integration Engine. Message mapping . . product. define technical system. . Initialize integration Repository 2. Register Queues SXMB_ADM Administration . Importing content to Integration repository Resides at sys\global\XI\repository server\import\. Import the design objects provided by SAP 3.Manage Queues . 1.XI Content contains predefined integration objects to avoid the design & development of objects.Each system is registered in the SLD.Edit .

Maintenance certificate locks SPAM & is valid for 3 Months. SLD. Transport Organizer User Interface INTEGRATION DIRECTORY It is used to define the configuration that will be used at runtime. Clear the cache if required for SLD Note: IR requires JAVA webstart which is around 30MB on each XI Consultant desktop.. 26-Aug-09 INTEGRATION REPOSITORY 1. Import XI Content 2.298 7. Import the system landscape (Products & Software components) into Integration Repository. Generate proxy objects (sproxy in ABAP) (Tools.SPROXY (Tcode) 8.Java prog (IR)) ABAP . Transaction SLDCHECK is used to check the SLD Connectivity 20. XI/ PI should be updated (kernel. CIM should be updated before any other system in the landscape. Go To > Int. Export XI Content 3. The interface objects are cached in the table which can be monitored by transaction. Patches). Repository > Environment > Configuration of Integration Directory It is also JAVA webstart on all the client machines Business System . 4. SXI_Cache (Status of XI runtime Cache) 19. Define the uniform resource name 5. Patching XI/ PI Use SPAM to patch ABAP Use JSPM to patch JAVA Maintenance certificate is mandatory for all the patches in NW04S SR3 form January 2009 onwards.

When the data is not updated in the messages during runtime. 1. Configuring Logs severity Goto T-Code : SXMB_ADM Integration Engine Configuration Click on specific configuration Click on change .Each XMI Message in flagged for archiving or deletion upon processing. IX0S & DARK are third party tools for archiving. Scheduling Archiving Job It is used to schedule the archiving based on time and date. Defining Interfaces for archiving & retention period. Goto : DB15 Tables in Object : SD_VDDAT 6.It is used to delete the messages (Activating the delete switch) . Party in a company customer.The service defined in SLD. (In ERP we use DB15.new entries Select the category Specify the parameter value QM1 . We can specify the sender & receiver whose messages can be flagged for archiving. to a technical system). Category : Parameters Monitor : PM2_Monitoring Tuning : EO_ 2. It is used to define the time period before it gets archived.Process Monitoring Info. Then we will go to ID to clear SLD. Schedule delete jobs Job Name: SAP_BC_XMB_DELETE_<Client> . Business Service . SF01 to configure & Schedule the archiving) 4. Receiver Determination to define namespaces. 3.299 The system that is defined in SLD (assigned with client no. File. Configure delete procedure in SXMB_ADM . 5. interface. SARA.

The message is received in IE or Server by using Inbound with logical routing & the message is processed through the outbound processing using LTM. 7. client & condition also set for tracing.Logical Routing T . receiver. Sender. Central_back. Create specify condition Username : DDIC Action: Trace level. It is used to process the message from Sender to the receiver. receiver_back) Each pipe line internally contains pipeline elements. Error Analysis Settings It is used to trace based on users.Technical Routing M .300 It is used to delete the messages that are flagged for deletion. Argument: 3 If the message id is 235 then logging in 1 If client is 000 then logging is 0 Display pipeline definition. 27-Aug-09 http://<hostname>:8000/sap/xi/engine RUNTIME WORKBENCH . It uses pipeline call integration server. There are 6 Pipeline (Central. Message processing is based on LTM L .Message Mapping Process Flow of Message The message is sent by a sender using by calling a outbound interface (Sending System). The message is received by the inbound proxy of the receiving engine & it acknowledges back to the integration server. Sender_back.

It specifies where the message is stuck in the error category. data and time. Component Monitoring 3. which will be displayed in the message monitoring 3. The message is received in the inbox of the integration server. Sender sends the message to integration server. 2. 1. The status determines whether the message can be processed or not. On day-day basis we need to identify the messages that are not processed and escalated to the respective trans. Messages can be filtered based on status. End to End Monitoring COMPONENT MONITORING: (INTEGRATION SERVER) It is used to monitor the Integration repository. Message Flow: 1.301 It is used to monitor the XML messages from one end to another end. It provides the following monitoring elements. Message Monitoring 2. sender. this should be displayed in the message monitoring. receiver. The message is processed with receiver determination to identify the receiver who is configured in the integration directory. Integration directory Runtime Wrokbench SLD Integration Server Note: We need to see the icon as green Yellow means warning Red as error. (Register in the SLD) . XSMB_ADM Message Monitoring: It is used to monitor the XML message use transaction SXMB_MON1/ SXI_MONITOR to monitor the message or the web option (rwb0 to monitor the message.

If receiver agreement not found than this error occurs.Thread Adapter Problems . SMQ2. Mapping Errors No_Mapping_Program_find (Indicates problem in the mapping programs) RFC ERRORS Check the RFC connectivity.exactly are the message has to be transferred.Connection Exceeded (Increase the ICM Threads/ Soft shut down RZ10) ICM/ Min . PI supports it. Check and refresh the cache using SXI_CACHE or check the configuration in the Integration Directory. Mapping: The sending message data structure should map with the receiving message data structure. 7. adapter engine is called (CAE).restart not possible.e. TOO_MANY_RECEIVE_CASE_BE There should be only one receiver in a synchronous message. HTTP.Full disk or database errors. BE . too many receivers are not allowed in BE SYNC (Synchronous) i. It consists of various adapters (File Adapter.302 4. 5. 6.cannot be resent. QUEUE MONITORING SMQ1.case . Gateway. Call Adapter: If required central. 'BE' . if the error is like SYS_FAIL . RINF. SOAP.e. i. J2SE. There are mapping failures (in IR). ICM . Interface determination Interface has to be determined so that the message will be pick by that API. ROSSATANET). J2EE. Userid and Password. No receiver . It is possible to define more than one receiver E010/ E0 Technical routing fails with message outbound binding not found. Technical Routing: This is where the exact business system of a sender and receiver is identified.ASYNC . If third party adapter like Tipco is used. monitor the status of queues.

there is a special instance that contains the message server and the enqueue server . If all the processes are occupied the requests are stored in the dispatcher queue.the SCS (System Central Services) for the AS Java. WE21/ To check IDOCS. The graphic below shows the components of the SAP NetWeaver Application Server (in grey). ○ The SAP Gateway provides the RFC interface between the SAP instances (within an SAP system and beyond system boundaries). To retain clarity a few communication channels are not included in the graphic. P4. More information: Internet Communication Manager (ICM) Work Process (BC-CST) SAP Gateway Java Cluster Architecture. IDEX5 is used to identify the XML Messages (IDOCS) in the adapter. and load balancing in the SAP system. In addition to multiple dialog instances that execute user requests. It supports HTTP. ● AS ABAP components (in the graphic on the left): ○ The dispatcher distributes the requests to the work processes. In AS Java the ICM supports the HTTP(S). A dialog instance with AS ABAP and AS Java consists of the following components: ● The Internet Communication Manager (ICM) sets up the connection to the Internet. Receiver and sender. It can process both server and client Web requests. IDOCS: If the messages are still processed using IDOCs use SM58. ● AS Java components (in the graphic on the right): ○ The Server Processes execute Java requests. The SAP NW AS can act as a Web server or a Web client. HTTPS und SMTP protocols for the AS ABAP. as well as one or more databases. IIOP and Telnet protocols. ● Central services (message server and enqueue server) are used for lock administration. message exchange. the ASCS (ABAP System Central Services). ○ The work processes execute ABAP or Java programs. Technical Components An SAP system consists of several application server instances.303 Check the adaptors and connection between IS. ○ The instance controller controls and monitors the life cycle of the AS Java instance. We also need to refresh adapter cache in SXI_CACHE into adapter engine cache. WE05. . It cannot process any dialog requests.

304 Upgrading Integration Develop * Customization Basis Platform .

0 i 4. 6.i BW Portals 4.7 ECC5 ECC6 ECC7 2. 3.1.. 7. FI. Tightly integrated with rich set of modules SD.0.305 Advantages of SAP 1.0. HR.1 5. Continuous improvement by releasing Support Packs.. Non Unicode / Unicode 4. CO. 7. Exchange information between SAP to SAP and NON SAP 11.5.0..1 12.0... PS.0. High level Security 5. Intranet and Internet (Web based) 13. Supports MCOP [OLAP/ OLTP) Supports all kinds of interfaces Will use XI to communicate with other GUI Developed in PHP or JAVA .5. MM. 3. OS Independent 8.0 c 4. DB Independent 9.1a b c . 3. Industry Specific Solutions 10. 7. PM.0 b 4. . Unicode system (Multi language Support) .0 a 4.1c. Upgrades and Enhanced Patches 2. Oil. Supports (24/7 * 365) 6.0 3. Insurance BI. 2. Netweaver 7. 3. PI etc.I18n 3.0 3. 7.

16. IS Textile. Solution Manager and CRM) ECC.Enterprise Central Component . SMB (Small Customers) . Pharmacy. Post Installation Activities + Specific post installation for (CRM.Small Midsize Business BI (Netweaver) latest in BI Suite7 Notes / Packs Support Packs Solution Manager EHP Good Feedback from the customers Good service provider from service.306 14. High Level Security (SOX) 15. Supports all third party tools mobile. BI.sap. Fabrication and Banking 17. Chemical. Insurance.com Internet/ Intranet http://<hostname>:8000 EWA MCOD/ OLTP BASIS NETWEAVER Requirements in the Market Basis Consultant Netweaver Security Consultant Enterprise Portal Tech Solution Manager Basis: A foundation layer for all SAP systems and with out Basis there is no SAP System Role of the Basis Admin 1. XI. Installation of all the above components 2... Oil.

Integration of BASIS and Internet/ Intranet all functionality of SAP defined in ABAP so called as SAPWEBAS ABAP SAPWEBAS JAVA to be more interactive through web.0. Administration & Monitoring 8. 11.0. Role Management 6. . 2.307 3.1. 3. 4.6) ECC BI B SCM A S SRM I S CRM Note: Application Server provides Internet and Intranet to BASIS SAP Web Application Server . 5. 13. 7. Performance & Fine Tuning 7. Web Application/ Portal Engineer SAP Business object Consultants People Soft tech lead-security/ Portal/ Admin SAP MM Consultant SAP SD Solution Architect SAP Basis Senior Consultant SAP FICO Consultant SAP Security Engineer SAP Development Lead SAP Security Admin Lead SAP technical architect consultant SAP Abap Principle Consultant (Exp in Life Cycle Stages) SAP XI/PI/ Enterprise portal lead developer/ programmer SAP BW Migration SAP Basis & Virtualization Consultant Basis Layer up to 4.5. Patch Management 4. 8. 10. 16. User Administration 5. Load Balancing 9. 6. | Security | Different level of Designations in SAP 1. 4. 4. 9. 12. Customize and Development. 15. 3. 14. 4.6D (3.

0. PI7. EP ITS NETWEAVER is a PIPA Application Platform People Integration Information Integration Process Integration BASIS ERP Security SD.0 SOLMAN.SAP software change registration. CO.0. MM. 3. PM.0 SAPWEBAS ABAP Provides Business Functionality SAPWEBAS JAVA Interactive/ Dynamic.0. SOX HR Security/ Structural Authorizations Netweaver User Management Engine J2EE Roles Single sign on LDAP User Administrative Monitoring BI Security. 7. PM. WEBAS Basis Layer Netweaver 7. MDM7.0 (SAP Stack) BI7. 700. Multilanguage SAPWEBAS Application platform to host all SAP Application components. 710 PI 7. . PS. XI Security WEBAS Java Security.308 Enterprise portal 640.10 XI 2. SD. SSCR .0. FI.

6D and so on .5B.. and click (not double click) on the Database server and then click on release notes. 4.6B. There you will see the SAP R/3 kernel and patch level etc. 4. 4.309 24/Jun/09 SAP R3 4. /usr/sap/<SID>/SYS/exe/run—the directory that holds a local copy of all SAP instance executables. libraries and tools How to know the kernel version of a SAP R3 system ? Goto transaction sm51...0B. .

To handle errors 6. or KERNEL: The kernel is the part of the Operating System(OS) that interacts directly with the hardware of computer through device drivers that are built into the kernel. To manage computer memory 2. To maintain file system 4. [Dev] ---------->[Qlty]---------->[Prod] SAPmnt . To handle interrupts 5. support packages. It provides set of services that can be used by programs insulating these programs from the underlying hardware. To allocate the resources of the computer (such as CPU and input/output devices) among users. profiles. To perform input and output services (which allows computers to interact with terminals storage devices and printers) and 7. -SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP. To control access to the computer 3. Major functions of kernel are: 1.310 Kernel or Shell : The core that provides basic services for all other parts of the operating system. executables etc between systems in the landscape. (It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based on Netweaver it is created automatically) SAPLoc in Windows This SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports.

For UNIX SAP SERVICE <SID> (OS Level Access Related to SAP) Sys system J2ee_ADMIN SAP* DDIC SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Master Database Java Web SAP R/3 Unicode . and is its own machine. Interface / Screen Exports/ System Copies Kernel [ Dependent] . A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. It requires its own address. A client accesses the servers.Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources. A host has its own address on the network. Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now day's only one Master password for all the userids. It provides access to services and information. Multiple Components on a Single DB repository A host is either a client or a server.SAP start ORA<SID> -.311 Default Users <SID>ADM -.

It process data rather than carrying data.SAP<SID> First Shipment Customers .SAP<SID> Owner 2 . GUI Presentation All the passengers Application Resrv.312 Install Mstr Java Comp JRE Exports [ Dependent] [ Independent] [ Dependent] [ Independent of OS. Alpha Versions) Libraries (Linux) ~ Exe (Windows) R/3 Architecture Eg: Consider the Reservation Counter.SMN SID .150 Customers (Beta. Counter <They do not carry Any thing> Database Centralized (Native form of Database) Mobile IE Debit Card ATM * Commit occurs then only amount (Synchronous update) will be debited from the ATM. DB] Multiple components on a Single DB SID . Caching/ Buffers Note: If one App server is down no need to worry we can access another application server. App server doesn't contain any data on its own.EPD EPDB SMNDB Owner 1. .

Company name. Kernel Set of Executables (OS.Rarely changed.Run .USR02.Transact SQL .313 Sql Server Oracle . Used to convert the data in to Native SQL Statements. Frequently accessed/ rarely changed (Master Data) Eg: Address. It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data as in Cache/ Buffer . Select BNAME from SAPSR3. (database users) (Sap Users) SAP K E R .Pl/ SQL Presentation Server: Submits the user request Application Server: Process the user request by interpreting the request and it has a queuing mechanism based on FIFO. Users always communicates in OPEN SQL which is SAP Specific format and not dependable on any database. DB. 32/64 bit dependent) \usr\sap\sol\sys\exe Start .sqlplus "/as sysdba" Select username from dba_users. Unicode.

Specifies the installation success / failure . Each task is commanded by . 2.tsk. Usr\sap\sol\sys\exe\uc\NT1386 25/Jun/09 Installation Logs C:\program files\sapinst_instdir\solman\system\ora\central\as Sapinst. Extracts the software. What happens during installation? 1.314 DB OS Kernel Provides communication between SAP.com/swdc .log file Eg: Sasapappl0.log .also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted .Structure of the DB Control.str .xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed. Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it from service.log Sapinst_dev.cmd file and during the process they writes into .tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB. DB and the OS.sap.xml Keydb.log Sapappl0.tsk Sapappl0.cmd Sapappl0.bck Sapappl0.

. SAPSID-Instance Number 5. create groups. ORA<SID> provides the runtime environment for Database. assign groups. create users. It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users . AD Admin . Windows App Server <SID>ADM UNIX App Server <SID>ADM Database ORA<SID> Database <SID>ADM Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL. (This problems occurs in a Domain) If the user does not exists it creates now. create services etc. On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the owner to work on the database.315 3.Can create the userid Note: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to install the software. Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment) Domain Admin.

SAP<SID>_01.OS Dependent .Master password is set accordingly to the company policy .Extract Kernel Executables (OS. SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it to ABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System) It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack. From Computer Management -> Local Users and Computers we can view this Users Groups Services Creating directories Executables . SAPOSCOL.Domain Level Local groups . SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) It is used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system. if the service is not started SAP will not start. It creates Services SAP<SID>_00. SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System.Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID Sets the user as nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28 SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine .Locally SAP_LocalAdmin SAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin SAP_SOL_LocalAdmin 6.DB Dependent Note: . DB) . SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.316 Global groups .

317 Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i. --.TPL Tablespaces are just like almoras in a house. these users owns the respective databases.Installation Successful -- Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\willsys\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS . The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen "2 complete 3 running 4 waiting" 11. Creates the Database and runs the scripts 8.str and data on the exports 10. owner from dba_tables group by owner. Query: Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = 'SAPSR3'..e. 7. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA. Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs. DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection. 12. 9. Now command files are created pointing to . Select count(*). 29769 ABAP related tables.

Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .318 PRFCLOG PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS .the complete SAP Application Server. .0. Installation Inputs SAPInst SID .is used to host the Developments PUT SID Hosts Trans 26/Jun/09 TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIX Solution Manager Connects all the three systems (ERP i. Netweaver & CRM2007) I.These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) . ECC6.e.is used during upgrade .

utilization and upgradability Eg: root in Unix C:\ in Windows 3. groups.toc. Kernel (Extraction). RDBMS (Structures)) 1. Check the installation Logs 4. VMACHINE. Unix) Sapinst.cmd. . III. Installation Logs Significance Sapinst_dir (Win. . Login to the system as <SID>ADM with the specified password 2. Directories. RFC's POST INSTALLATION To Check/ Test the installation Pre. Linux. Services. Installation Steps Users. .cmd . CreateDB. Check the disk space. SharedMnt. log.tsk.DXDIAG Tool on windows to check the consistency of the hardware . Updated Stats. .tpl. II.str. sapinst_dev. Check the Hardware conflicts using OS Utilities Run .Requisites for the Installation (JAVA.319 Instance Number (Default 00. LoadDB. . 01) Mater Password JCE Policy Path for the CDs.

.Used to collect the OS Resources 2. SAP<SID>_00 .Cmd . Oracle Service<SID> Which is required for the Database On UNIX ps . Listener . Trans Directory ."\\Willsys\Usr" 9.Which is mandatory to start SAP 3.ABAP Instance Checks the DB Status 98-99 for routing .msc 8.. App) predefined shared SAP Directory with SharedMnt. SAPSERVICE<SID> 6. Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files.. Check the two Installation users on OS From Local Users and Computers <SID>ADM. Check the services and ensure that they are running 1. (SAPMnt).. Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA-DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR 7.Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4. SAPOSCOL .ef | grep ora* On Windows services. SQL> Startup followed by enter key SQL> shutdown immediate Note: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box SAPOSCOL_00 . and SAPLoc on windows Run .Used for transporting the Objects Note: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by the instance number Queries: SQL> Select status from V$Instance.320 5.

<SID> Directory \usr\sap\<SID>.SRM Suppliers .. Config.321 SAPOSCOL_01 .JAVA Instance Note: Each SID uses different Ports Note: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES..PI Dealers Enterprise Portal .. \usr\sap\<SID>\config on a particular <SID> ERP <SID1> EP BI JAVA ABAP ERP<SID2> EP BI JAVA ABAP Note: Now-a-days its possible to install different engines as add-ons... USERS and GROUPS) are available then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system. 10...properties . 11..SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM direntories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA) Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine Eg: Consider Hero Honda Land Scape BI .Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 .CRM ....used to specify the usage types that are installed on the system. DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 . Usagetypes..ERP (ECC5..is a ABAP Engine JC00 .0) .

cmd Note: Exe directory holds commands.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64.log . Checks the DB startup User issues a command called startsap 2. SYS Directory Contains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the system EXE Directory . Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs -------------------Starting and Stopping SAP System Open up the services file from windows\system32\etc Startup: What happens during the startup? 1. i386/ ia64 In 4.cmd In order to start the system it looks in to the profile START_DVEBMGS00_WILLSYS28 <Instance> <Host Name> 3. scripts and executables \USR\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386\ strbs. sapstart.log (Standard Error Log) \USR\SAP\SOL\DVEBMGS00\WORK Eg : .7 we can see only exe directory 13. It starts the database and writes the logs into the work directory Note: Stderr1. It starts database by using command strbs.322 12.

Central Instance 3. 27/Jun/09 Note: Solution Manager Connects all 3 Sys . dialogue by using disp+work and writes into Dev_disp.exe and writes Log file into dev_icm. ICM 2. Starts the instance i.0. Starts Application Server (Central Instance) It is started by using msg_server. JAVA) 1.exe and writes the log into Dev_ms. Installation Logs and then Significance . 6. 5. Installation Steps 4. Dialogue Instance 4. STARTUP Sequence 1..e. stderr2.. BI.. Installation Inputs 3. dev_w0. Dialogue 3. Starts internet communication manager by using icman.ERP (ECC6. XI. Netweaver & CRM 2007) Netweaver components (EP. dev_w1. Database Server/ Instance 2..323 If the folder name changed as NTi386 to NTi3867 sap wont startup 4. Database. Pre-requisites 2.. ICM SHUTDOWN Sequence 1. Central 4.

cmd .. Installation Guide Www. Starting and Stoping System 7. Installation post steps 1. Startup Errors and Resolution 8.Ports should not be used 6.. . Pre-Requisites 1.log. Hardware 2. CRM/ SOLMAN/ XI.sql Listner control -> Lsnrctl Lsnrctl start Look for services Oracleservice <SID> and Oracle Listner.. Kernels SAPInst.v9start.cmd We should logon as <SID>ADM/ ORA<SID> win/ UNIX to start database. CPIC_MAX_CONV = 500 CPIC Protocal (Common Programming Interface for Comm) In Linux # setem CPIC_MAX_CONV 500 and press enter Inputs: Steps: Logs: Checklist: Startup Startup Uses MMC ->Select SID -> RT Click . CD with Lable. Swap memory 20GB RAM * 3 Times 5.4/2_12 7. startdb.Strdbs. JRE and set the path 1.we cannot startup the database Database terminated or Aborted which may requires restore & recovery. JAVA.Start It reaches from the Startup Profile Start Database --.asc 8. Servicemarketplace/instguide 3..Log Directories Why the Database is not started? 1. stderr*. Installation Check/ Test 6.324 5. Master Pwd.. strbs. SAPInst_Dev. Sizing H/w (If user increases) 4.Log. SID.log. IP Address/ Hostname . (Root and Administrator) .

. Memory could not be allocated as per the Oracle Profile Parameters 3. Causes: 1.. D:\ Oracle\ SOL\ Saptrace\ background\ alert_<SID>..exe and writes log into Dev_ms. Certain scripts need to run after upgrade else the db many not start Export Oracle/ HP Unix Shared Drive Import DB2 Linux Kernel takes care of Migration Exports OS/ DB Independent CreateDB 5.. ora-600 etc.log Starting Message server Started by using msg-server.willsys. Port number 3600 is not available 3... Dev_ms should be logged with customer key 5. There is no sufficient space to start database 2. Analyze Alert <SID>. 1.Oracle Instance started.com) 4.325 Database can be started using command startup or startup open SQL> startup Says.log/ stderr log file It could not be started due to the following reasons. File permissions on the profile/ file or Dir does not exist. 4. Changes or corrupted profile parameters.. Starting Dispatcher and work process It uses disp+work to start the instance and writes the logs into stderr/ dev_disp/ dev_w0.log for Oracle errors like 0ra-1578. . Fully qualified host name FQHN dev_ms the host name should suffix with at least two dots (Eg: www. Hostname/ Ip address change 2..

If any of the memory. 5. Set the parameters rdisp/trace = 0. Start_DVEBMGS00_Hostname 2.need to started on Linux Manually Refer. It provides value globally to all the instance when more than one instance is configured.log ] From this we can find when the system is up or down. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_Hostname Resides in \usr\sap\<SID>\sys\profile Default Profile Startup Instance Default profile is used to provide default parameters to start the system. System Profiles There are three profiles 1. Message server/ DB down 3. Dev_disp {started .connected} If the logs could not be analyzed to debug on error situations then Rt click on the process -> Select Developer Trace. dev_w0.3. Hostname/ IP Address change 2.dev_rd. dev_rfc. DVEBMGS00\Work [ Available.2.326 Various Reasons for the Failure 1. Dispatcher is started by using parameters from <SID>_DVEBMSGS00_hostname.1. . (Work directory can be deleted and recreated) Each work process goes to the db and db will listen the workprocess OracleSOL01TNSListner .4 It will write enormous log file into work directory. Default.pfl 2. buffer tuning parameters are not configured properly then instance could not be started. We need to set this value to Zero immediately after debug. Connection to Database failed due to authorization/ listner 4.

ICM startup. ICM Startup. : There will be only one default profile.the profiles will be = 20 * 2 + 1 20 Instances * 2 (Startup and Instance) + Default Instance is a set of services with a dispatcher and work process.. Dialogue Instance Database Central Instance Dialogue Instance Dialogue Instance Default Profile: Start_Dev : Eg: Common Dress Code applicable to all Eg: Started Individually Eg: Senior .327 Dialogue instance is something like extending reservation counters when users increase. msg server. Say for Eg: 20 Instances . work process.. DISP+WORK Instance profiles governs the instance such as work process/ memory/ logon parameters/ ICM parameters . work process. dispatcher. Startup profile will be available for all the instances and it contains database. Instance profile depends upon the resources and it contains only dispatcher. Junior depending on the resources <SID>_dev.

640. It is also referred as an Interface Eg: SAPGUI It has various versions: 4. Maintenance Activities 4. 28-Jun-09 Architecture of R/3 R/3 Multilayer PS AS DS PS - It is a GUI from where the user submits the request.look for all the instances. Power Outages 5.6d.JAVA (Non Windows.6c. During OS/ Database updates 3. Notify all the users using email. Offline Backup Schedule Downtime 1. Changes in SAP Parameters 6.328 RZ03 . 4. [SM02] 2. 700. Shutdown: 1. Similarly Netweaver also include Mobile Infrastructure to provide mobile interface. there are three types SAPGUI for windows. JAVA. Stop the dialogue instances 3. stop the central instance 4. 620. During H/w Migration 2. Unix) . 710 From Netweaver onwards to provide Web functionality <<internet communication framework>> ICF is provided so that the system can be accessed through web browsers. stop the database. HTML . Installation of SAPGUI Use the presentation server DVD to install SAPGUI.

Used for load balancing 3.to access sap library 5. ->BSP (Business server pages) ->PING Activate All the functionalities over the web.ini . SAPROUTE. SAPLogon. Solman\gui\press\gui\. SAPRFC.net) Ports 8000: ABAP . Goto SAP Internet Communication Framework (SICF) Tcode: SICF Login to the system with the user DDIC with the Master password and create a super user similar to DDIC Use SU01 Tcode to create a user Note: Dont allow to perform by the DDIC SICF and press enter Under SAP ->Public ->BC (Basis connector) ->Rt click activate.ini . open it and try to add some items. SAPMSG.to access servers over router 4.ini . Activating Webgui/ SOLMAN functionality over the web.for RFC these files govern SAPGUI and requires on each end user desktop based on the need.ini . Goto SE80 and publish system/ Internal Note: Download SAPNote to activate SICF services.ini . SAPLOGON..ini copy on the desktop.Mandatory 2. The system name should be FQHN (Fully qualified with atleast two dots eg: www. 1.329 We need to maintain the following initialization files..sillsys. SAPDOCCD.

CI . Select . It is used to store the Data. Interpretation of user requests. this parameter needs to be set in RZ10. Instance provides memory.webgui -> publish complete service Application Server: It is a physical entity used to handle the user requests.Internet service System Under object name folder "System" rt click -> publish complete service. SE80 . It provides Message server and Enque server along with other services.Select . Dialogue Instance: It is required to handle additional load on the SAP System. Instance is represented by its dispatcher & work processes (Disp + Work) Central Instance: There will be only one central instance in the sap system. Queue mechanism based on FIFO etc.Client Oracle DB DI .sap.330 50000: JAVA ICM/ Hostname_full = willsys28. In sap terms it is an instance. Database Layer/ Database Server/ Database Instance: There will be only one database instance in the SAP System. buffers.. Instance has its own instance number and it is possible to install multiple instances on single application server based on available resources.Client . CPU. Instance is a service that represents the sap runtime.net.

Used to configure transport management system. 3. Post-Installation Activities 1.331 We need to have a client to communicate with the Native SQL Each instance is monitored by its own DPMON (Dispatcher Monitor) For Net weaver JCMON ICMON [SMICM] ICM Monitor. SE03 System settings(Modifiable and Non-Modifiable) In most cases PRD/ QAS are set to not Modifiable DEV/ SAND/ TEST are set to modifiable. SE06 Post installation Activity 2. STMS .

SR13 9. 6. SCCL 13. buffer parameters Define client Client copy Define Operation modes to effectively utilize resources Assign Timings . memory. RZ10 11. PFCG 10. SM63 Import profiles from OS Level to DB Create Super Users Schedule standard batch jobs Additional Languages configuration Library configuration Define custom roles and assign to users. RZ04 14. Define work process. SM36 7. RZ10 5.332 4. SCC4 12. SMLT or I18N 8.

16 SAP-BW . Hotpacks In UNIX # mount IP: / oracle/dump /oracle/share 29/Jun/09 23. Apply license through transaction SLicense (Access Market Place to apply License) 20. BRTOOLS 16. Notes These are small corrections to the programs which are applied through transaction SNOTE .35 ABAP . SMLG Configure logon loadbalancing 19. SICF/ SE80 Take offline backup Enable WebGUI 17. Upgrade Kernel and SPAM version Kernel software and SPAM .333 15. SPAM Applying support packages 21.13 Add-on System-status: .16 PI-BASIS . Install Dialogue Instances if required DB Client software 18.20 BI-Cont .Component Version .16 BASIS .from System-component information We need to apply patches (Kernel Info) Database Kernel R/3 Kernel Patches that are applied online without restarting the System 22.

SAP SOLMAN) TCODE .Solmon click on mirror icon . Support Package Group of notes. Licensing 8 Licenses for SOLMAN 8 Licenses for Netweaver Valid till 31-12-1999 service. Enhancements and additional functionality..c. Basis PI Basis.Key and Requests . Kernel.334 24. SAPM et.SLICENSE System .status . program corrections.Request Permanent license key .sap. 25. Support Stacks It is a group of support packages that includes ABAP.SAP Netweaver. bug fixes.com From the tab called .provide type of system like (SAPERP.

Connection Test (Online SAP Service) Note: ARAMCO .335 TCODE .is having the following system landscape SAND TEST CUST (DEV) QTST TRNG PPRD PRD MIGR/ PRL LICENSING .OSS1 or SM59 Go through: SAPOSS .

--14. SRM.40000 USD .000 ------------------------14.SOLMAN.000 4% VAT 17% Maintenance /Year 48.5000 . BI. 000 2.4000 USD In India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum Developers are charged differently 10 Users + 1 Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.3 Months Each user license cost . EP. 000 20. 04.270 -50000 One License .8000 USD 10.000 2. 000 -----.04.till 9999(YYYY) . MI License is user based Once the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button . ECC.336 Standard License Maintenance License . PI.04. 00. 68.3% Service Tax + Customs 22% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA 5 22% Eg: 1 24% Telco Bajaj ARAMCO 2 26% . 000 .

It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP. Hostname 3.0 (Enterprise Portal) 2. Suport. SID 2.Its an executable) Note: All the executables resides in .ppt.0 to ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7.D:\USR\SAP\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386 Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapest SAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAP USMM . It provides Road map for Implementation.System Measurement for the users SUSER . 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7.) /rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3.0. .0. Upgrade.0. Current version is 4.get It checks for 1.0 (Process Integration).BI7.6.. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. EP7. url.4 weeks will be applied on PRD.. 1..) .0 but from MAY.337 From cmd prompt Soladm> saplicense .BASIS 7.0 like ABAP 7..Password never expires (Service Userid) SAP Solution Manager Note: Patches should be applied on Test/ Cust first after 3 . .pdf. Hardware Key (Installed by SAP . PI7.doc.

30-Jun-09 SM36 Default Scheduling Totally 14 Jobs Will be OS level i. we need to import into database level Utilities -> Import Profiles SM21 step by step process of startup Static parameters . Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN 4.requires a restart Dynamic parameters . Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesn't Requires a key.338 3.e.doesn't require a restart.. RZ10 .

In the post installation only STMS is configured 7. ABAP Instance comes with 0 Java instance comes with 1. next enqueue and then the dispatcher (Or) Goto . programs owned by the user. 1.339 --- Notes -- Note: First Message Server comes up.dev_ms log file Network works for Message server and Message server searches for the least loaded dispatcher for load balancing SU53 Contains what all the notes.150MB) 3.5 Users Each work processes (15 . DEV . 2. CTS is ran before STMS (SAP Transport Management System) 8.066 Early Watch Client . Client . 4.QTY -PRD . screens. Post Installation activities should be done on 003 or other and not on 001 5. Dialogue work processes only communicate with the user.001 Production Client Wont be used in PRD 6.000 Master Client CLient.work directory . Dialogue writes the entry of the background job in the following tables TBTCP and TBTCS Each dialogue .

DbClk on Starting Interval and Ending Interval SMLT or I18N Language Installation Languages -> Classify Just provide the language ARABIC Then save it GOTO I18N System configuration .PRD 1. Dev will be the Domain Controller Some times whenever the system is always available say for eg: PRD will be considered to be DC.340 3 system landscape DEV QTY PRD 2 system landscape SCC1 instead of STMS in case of 2 system landscape STMS QTY . Used to transport Mass data @ single shot is a tcode to wake up all the programs availability for load balancing incase of two instances TP SGEN SMLG HalfPeak Hours 2 Background process Dialogue is converted to Background SR13 RZ04 Help (Before this we need to run an executable Maintain operation modes Operation mode .Night Dia to Bck SM63 . Done from the Domain Controller 2.

car.341 ADD And provide AR ARABIC Click on simulate RZ11 Parameter setting Display profile parameter attributes Zcsa\installed languages System Language \usr\sap\trans .Select Interval and Assign . .jar files (Parameter) .place the dump here 01-July-09 SM63 Select the interval Operation Mode .

0 (Process Integration).0 to Ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7..0.BASIS 7.. System Administration 3.0. Configure the satellite systems (SMSY) . 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7. It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. Maintenance Optimizer (MUPZ) 5.0 like ABAP 7. PI7.0 SR3) CD . url. Early Watch Reports (EWA) 6. Define a Solution and include systems for the following 1.pdf. Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN 4.BI7. . EP7. Upgrade.ppt. 5.342 Note: Ports for Oracle Listener (1527 to 1521) Oracle\sol\sapbackup . It provides Road map for Implementation. and Suport.. Current version is 4..) /rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3.0 but from MAY.0 (Enterprise Portal) 2.6.Oraarch (SOLMAN 4. . System Monitoring 2.0. Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesn't Requires a key.RMMAIN Solution Manager 1.) 3.doc. Service Level Reporting (SLR) 4.

2. . Realization Phase (Solar02) 4. We can also document the hardware info. 1. SAP Router 12. H/w manufacturer and service Level agreements. Business Blue Print phase (Solar01) 3. It is a landscape information provider and specifies the following. Hostname. These are required to Monitor. Support pack levels. VSCAN Tcode . Project Preparation (Solar_proj_admin) 2. Client information etc. Once the satellite system is configured there will be a trusted connection b/w the systems. Project Management for implementation 1. Documentation (Final preparation/ Go Live are not captured) 9. Satellite systems are the backend systems which are defined in the SAP Landscape. 2. Solution manager will be in a separate system.343 (Hanging systems in the landscape are called satellite systems) 7. S_SMC_47000017/ CRM_DNO_Monitor Tcodes System should be registered with Solman to get the support 8. System Landscape Directory (SLD) (SMD) (BPMON) Eg: Logon to Solman and administrate everything on the landscape Creating Satellite systems 1. These exe are required to be at OS level to startup the engine. Instance Number and Installation No..interface to upload the documents without any virus. Solution Manager Diagnostics 10. Business process monitoring 11. Note: Except exe's everything will be stored in DB. Administer the systems from a central location called Solution Manager. sizing. 3. Configured the service Desk to raise the issues as tickets and forward them to SAP if required.

servers.It is mandatory to provide the installation key for all the Netweaver system without which the installation cannot be continued. Goto SMSY . Satellite systems 3. Hostname. Put a check mark under SAPECC Server. all of those are created automatically when a satellite system is defined.Tcode . Subsequently we can define systems. License Keys or / Installation Keys/ or Upgrade Keys 2. 02-Jul-09 Configuring SOLUTION MANAGER SMSY Goto SMSY .Goto .SMSY and it is used to define the following. It is required only for Central Instance as it is tied up with the Message Server.Other Objects a pop up box is prompted to provide the inputs Provide SID. License Keys .Select main Instance (RT Click) .344 Goto . Instance Number and Click on generate Installation or upgrade key.Under landscape components . Under relevant Continue --> .Create New System with assistance. MsgServer Hostname. 1. This key is called as Solution manager key and it is system specific (SID. Define the logical components 1. Instance Number). databases manually but.

345 Provide System Number Message Server Continue --> Generate RFC Destinations Assign Logical components Clients .800 Establishes put a check mark the connections put a check mark b/w R/3 and Solman 00 wilerpdev (Satellite system host name) Continue --> Select use scenarios: Select .Trusted system RFC Connection Continue --> Note: SOLMAN will connect to the back end system either trusted/ Logon screen Outgoing RFC's RFC Connection for Read Access Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLMANSOL001 Continue -->> RFC Connection for Change Management Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLTMWSOL001 Continue -->> RFC Connection for Trusted Connection Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLMANSEWD .

346 Additional RFC Connection Data Continue -->> System Monitoring Connection Check Mark . To create users and RFC connections in the Satellite system (it 3 times knocks the door of the back end system) and the 4th time need to provide the username and password for the solution manager. SAP* and DDIC doesn't have this authorizations Goto .Just save it.need to provide the password for the back end system. S_RFCACL in the role to create and communicate with the back end systems. The user should have the authorization objects S_RFC. Provide the description and Click on Menu Tab .Assign System Monitoring Continue -->> Complete -->> It brings up the password screen 3 times .Role Maintenance Provide the role name ZRFC and click on Single Role Prompts to Save this .PFCG .

. back Click on User tab and assign the user the perform User comparison SMSY Continuation -Creating the Logical System Logical components are more important to communicate with specific client.....347 Assign the transaction by clicking Transaction Button and assign SU53 Tcode And click on assign transactions Click on Authorizations Tab and click on change Hit on manually and Include Authorization Objects Select S_RFC and S_RFCACL and save. specific role in the back end system. Click on generate profile.

Change Management. refresh data. Logical components specify the client number and the client role. 4. Create systems. . Administration.RFC Configurations Even we can delete RFC connection from SM59 Note: Ensure that RFC Connections are created earlier. users are not existing Delete the user by ensuring that they are not pointed to any RFC and similarly RFC Connections as well. Maintenance optimizer etc. software components. Assign logical components 5. NAME. Create solutions (Early Watch Alerts) Solutions are required for Monitoring. Select the system --> Assign Logical Component --> Specify client --> Specify role etc SM59 . Configure satellite systems Eg: DESC V$DATABASE Select DBID. Created from V$DATABASE.. SMSY is used for the following 1. Create products.0 Role Development Client 800 Assign Logical components to the system that is created. databases for the satellite system 3.348 Main Instance SAP ECC Server Logical Component SAP ECC 6. Reporting. servers. and regenerate RFC's and Delete RFC's 1. Installation Key/ Upgrade Key 2.

Transport Management System From Menu Help -> Create Support Message and this message will land up in Solution Manager.English SMSY is called as system landscape where we try to include a landscape.com It is used to communicate with SAP Market place using SAP Router. . Select solution landscape/ Maintenance (Search for SAP Router) 03/Jul/09 STMS . 4. Provide solution (Any name eg: ECC Solution) Lang . Click on Maintain Global data Type under the url as : service. Solution Landscape which is used to include logical components (<SID>Client) so that all the above activities are carried out based on Solution.sap. 3. Click under or on Solution 5.349 Goto T-Code DSWP/or Solution_Manager 1. Click on create to create a solution 2.

Spool bottle neck Critical Business Process Note: We can also integrate ticketing tools like Remedy. Solman has its own Service Desk (Ticketing Tool) Continuation from 02/Jul/09 T-Code: DSWP Click on Solution Landscape Solution Landscape Maintenance .Expensive reports bottle neck . Database is filled 80% and need to send me an email.. Note: process will be slow down because of some expensive reports (select * from . .. group_admin and SID Admin Note: System .Status (From here we need to apply patches) in Solution Manager Note: Maintenance Optimizer is used to find the next level of patches available.350 Note: Group users can only be modified by that owner of the group i.. Synergy with the Solution Manager. Service Level Reporting means Eg: Consider the domestic cylinder.Memory Bottle Neck .) might be running even the processor is good enough to handle.e.

351 Specify the Logical Component names and select the SID:Client Number (Put in Solution) Under logical component Select SAP ECC save it and click on Solution Settings .Task assigned but activities are missing Green . If not Gowith SMSY and create the logical system Systems > Rt Click SU53 What user is having SU56 user buffers Yellow Color . Setting up Operations Goto: DSWP/ Solution Manager Maintenance Select the solution Click on operations setup Select solution monitoring Click on early watch alerts Create SAP Early watch alert Service Create .TAB Provide .save and activate Go back and save -goback comeback .Time interval 5 Mins under Monitor graph refresh period And click on CCMS MONITORING OF EWA (Early Watch Alerts) Select the system .Check Mark .Task not assigned Red Color .Confirm Sap Specified Alerts .Successful * Note: Through SMSY we can find whether the logical systems are assigned or not. NOTE: Interface Scenarios is for Project Management Save the solution and we should able to see the system/ solution in EWA and the system and server information should be fetched into solution directory.Check Mark . SM59 to verify this system is monitored by SOLMAN or not.Solution Settings TAB CCMS MONITORING OF EWA.

. Reports. SID SMD | INSTALLATION NUMBER 0020311138 | ACTIVE Check Mark Save it.352 The early watch alert service runs the transaction SDCC (Service Data Control Center) in the specified systems and brings the alerts based on SAPS threshold values Eg: Expensive transactions. Once we save the solution under > Solution Structure > Copy Customizing | | The SAP System with all the details are displayed It is an option to copy the customizing of alerts From another solution. Provide Source| Destination If CCMS(Computing center Monitoring system) connectivity is in red or CCMS destination is blank then Goto RZ21 Monitoring Properties and Methods From Menu . RFC Destinations SM_WISCLNT001_READ SM_WISCLNT001_ONLINE . Sql Statements etc. Users.Technical Infrastructure Display Topology It displays all the systems that are subjected for monitoring through this system. System Monitoring Goto: Solution Manager Select the solution Click on operation setup Select system monitoring Select setup system monitoring Select the SID and Installation number and it should be in Active. Click on create Target SID .

For latest version we need to download from the Market place.. Copy the executables saprouter. Procedure .Save It.com/patches) The SAProuter version must not be under 23. BASIS.). Download the latest version of the SAProuter from SAP Service Marketplace. Create the subdirectory saprouter in the directory <drive>:\usr\sap. Prerequisites (Till 6th point is from SAP Website not from Willsys Notes) You have the latest version of SAProuter (available from the SAP Service Marketplace (http://service. ST-PI. It will be in the run directory (Older versions).Background jobs bottle neck .exe and niping.User defined Alerts Select all the alerts and their threshold values .6 c is a Basis | A T C H E S | P Front End Netweaver7 ADP HP ARAMCO .Dialogue process bottle neck Go through other options under Setup system monitoring | . PI-BASIS etc.. ..Printing bottle neck .sap.353 This requires the satellite systems required patch up (ABAP.exe to the directory you have just created. Read the README file in this package. 04/Jul/09 SAP Router It is an executable file downloaded from service market place. This is to ensure the compatibility between Solution Manager and the Satellite systems Eg: Back end 4. 1. 2.

\saprouter\saprouter.. 6. SAProuter should not run under the SystemAccount.354 If there is no SAProuter there... you have to enter the following in the registry: Under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE  SYSTEM  CurrentControlSet  Services  Event Log  Application enter the key saprouter and define the following values for it: EventMessageFile (REG_SZ): . It is important that the parameters are within the character string enclosed in double quotation marks. remove the definition of the service from the Registry and restart the host.exe. set the startup type to “automatic” and enter a user..exe TypesSupported (REG_DWORD): 0x7 Or In usr\sap directory create a sub folder called SAPRouter.. 3. SAP Router are meant to login to our SAP System (remote) by the SAP to resolve any issue that may occur.exe -p “service -r <parameter>“ Please note: The points stand for <drive>:\usr\sap <parameter> can be replaced by other parameters with which SAProuter is to be started. you can get a version (may be obsolete) from your directory <drive>:\usr\sap\<SID>\SYS\exe\run. Define the service with the following command: ntscmgr install SAProuter -b . 5. 4.\saprouter\saprouter. To avoid the error message “The description for Event ID (0)” in Windows NT event log. Define standard service properties in Control Panel ® Services. Locale -a will tells us what language the system will support .. If SAProuter has already been entered as a service with srvany. Keep the files in TRANS Directory and usr\sap\trans.. We have to maintain maintenance optimizer in Solution Manager and should get an approval to download SAP Router with our host name and IP Address (This info need to send to SAP) We have to download Cryptographic file so that it will connect to SAP System by converting the password related information.

SPRO stands for .Online SAP Service AISUSER . The entries in OSS1 (It is a transaction) reflected in RFC Connection SAP-OSS Copy SAP OSS RFC to SAP-OSS.SAP Project Reference Object OSS . S_SMC_47000017 (To Check the messages in the SOLMAN System) Or CRM_DNO_MONITOR Also refer BCOS_CUST table End user can create a message by using the T-Code: NOTIF_CREATE Note: SPRO1 is used to perform post installation activities for the Solution Manager. Clarity.Maintain Optimizer Setup Provide SUSERID: without zeros With this user only the maintenance optimizer will work.service.sap. Earlier OSS1 is used to serve as a Market place to the customers but due to the network congestion between the customer and say systems SAP discontinued the usage of OSS1 and service market place www. user is SUSERID. The major advantage of this tool is It picks up the complete information of the users-screen so that the processing is simplified.355 Checking the Routing connectivity with SAP Trans-OSS1 is used to configure the connectivity with SAP. Synergy ticketing tools.com is recommended for connectivity. Service Desk It is a tool used to create messages from the satellite systems and monitor from the solution manager. Client 001. SAPSNOTE and provide the logon security details that is language EN. Note: Any changes in the route tab require the router to be restarted. This tool is similar to Remedy. . if this RFC doesn't work we can't establish connectivity with SAP.

In the current version of netweaver most of the components are activated. Solutions . But when we install the system with lower package levels {Solution Manager 4. MOPZ When ever we need Read permissions for CCMS monitoring we have to define topology.. Satellite Systems 2. Installation Base We can use this to identify the installation base of the satellite system. Service Desk . SOLMAN_DIRECTORY Goto solution manager and use above tcode to find the solution.Create Installation Base Initial data transfer for IBase .IB52 .0} with base level 6 then we need to activate upon upgrading the patch levels. We need to activate business sets for service desk. EWA (Early Watch Alerts) 4. maintenance optimizer.Service Level reporting 7. change request management etc. Administration 6.356 5-Jul-09 TASKS 1. /SCPR20 is a transaction which is used to activate the business sets that are provided in the system. System Monitoring 5.Entry in Table 8. SLR .Installation BAK .Activating EWA (Early Watch Alerts) 3. Goto IB52 or DSWP Select solution Goto the menu .Activating . Maintenance Optimizer.BCSET .

de/swdc Support packages and patches entry by application group Maintain the table AISuser In order to maintain this table SAP_MAINT_OPT_ADMIN role should present. Goto Backend system Create an RFC pointing to Solman S_SMC_47000017 to check whether the tickets from various systems are landed in Solution manager. if a service desk message is raised it uses the above RFC to land the ticket.. https://websmp203-sap-ag. AIS user is used to maintain service market place userid to communicate with SAP and the RFC Connection will be SAP-OSS 06-Jul-09 Configuring Maintenance Optimizer It is a tool provided by SAP to ensure that all the support packages that are released after April 2007 related to Netweaver will be approved and downloaded through MOPZ we can add support packages to the download basket in the Market place.e. Ensure that your solution manager is having support package ST[Solution Tools] minimum 10 level.357 Creating Business Partner Use transaction BP to create Business Partner. Goto DSWP Select the solution Goto edit Create business partner Select the users . Goto TCODE AISUSER .create That user will be a partner in our solution manager. Goto the Satellite system Tcode: SM30 Table BC_BCOS_CUST this table maintains the RFC connections for the service desk and CHAMS i.

Select the component and system 3. Maintenance optimizer is only an authorized solution.Download Manger. (Need to use carefully in the production system) 1. SOLMAN40_MOPZ_TTYP_SLMO_000 SOLMAN40_CHARM_PROXYFACT_001 Note: BCSET should be activated only once because it over writes the existing data Tcode: /$tab /$sync deletes the buffer on the application server. Create Maintenance Transaction 2.358 User Contact Person Sapuser 5013295 The user with which we login or the user in the user master record.. Project Preparation 2. Goto download manager and download the files and perform the maintenance i. Business Blue Print phase . 1296589 (notes) Start . 1242931. 4.. Assign SAP service Market place userid without "S000" SAP-OSS (RFC connection should also use the same userid to communicate with the market place) Activate BCSET or MOPZ is upgraded through Solution Manager Goto SPRO or SCPR20 activate.e.. applying the patches manually. Allow the solution manager to choose the support packages or choose download manager to select the support packages. Project Management SAP Solution manager provides project implementation tools through ASAP methodology (Accelerated SAP) ASAP Methodologies : It contains 5 steps 1.. Click on continue to confirm the files in the download basket.SAP Download manager . 5.

SAP uses tcode: SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN Click on create 1. Scenario is nothing but a group of transactions that are related to a specific module like SD. 3. Key process indicators. template or support. Realization Phase 4. etc also referred as Steering Committee (With some management skills) These committees assemble from time to time & review the progress of the project. Milestones are defined. HR. support. upgrade. upgrade etc. Type of project Implementation. Golive / Support 1. Companies such as IBM may create a template project so that all the projects follows the same.359 3. Final Preparation 5. Provide project name 2. business owners. Select Led by (Customer or SAP) Provide plan days say 2000 PD 5. implementing partner. Define the scope of the work under SCOPE tab Note: Include the logical component that is going to be involved in the project From system landscape tab define the logical system 2. FI. customer. MM. Business Blueprint In this phase the project is documented and the blue print gets signed off from the customer. BI etc The scenarios are provided through SAP BPR (Business Process Repository) . Select the solution: EWD solution for eg Hit okie 4. The core team is defined from SAP. persons (Responsible persons). Project Preparation: During this phase the business requirements are gathered and documented. Tcode: SOLAR01 is used to define the business blue print This is a phase where the required scenarios are selected.. Project type can be implementation.

1H Basis 310 3.0D Basis 300 3. Unit testing: Used to test the customizing in its test client within the same system.0B Basis 400 4. 1. Testing Testing takes place either in the testing client.0F Basis 300 3. 2.Includes SOLMAN .0E Basis 300 3. Tcode: SCC1 is used to copy the requests between clients before change requests are released. Realization Is a place where the actual configuration takes place SOLAR02 Note: Solution Manager is also called as frontend platform to configure all the back end systems. .. EP etc. Integration testing: It is performed in a separate system QAS Non _ Modifiable Note: Netweaver 2004 Netweaver 2004s Netweaver 2007 3.5B Basis 450 . The configuration takes place and change requests are generated in the target system subsequently a support message is raised to release or import the transport request before testing.Includes SOLMAN.1I Basis 310 4. BI.ERP .360 07-Jul-09 3. 4. integration client and test cases are built during the configuration only.

GOTO .RMMAIN) It provides the complete implementation steps which are discussed above along with accelerators.0) . MOM's (Minutes of Meeting) Etc.. Accelerators are nothing but predefined templates. CHARMS .00 Basis 7.20 4. 6. BCSET 5. Installation 2.0 .to apply patches. Administration 4. Data Transfer to SAP system is performed periodically fro legacy systems and the legacy systems are discontinued in due course of time upon final acceptance from the business process owners.e.Enterprise Core components) 6. url's.. proxy. The integration testing signoff from the users. filters and SAP Router etc.From Menu GOTO .User request a change (Say for Eg . both Legacy and SAP runs together for certain period of time.72 Basis 6.00 (ECC 6.RMMAIN .Select the ASAP Methodology .Modify a storage location) . ROAD MAP (Tcode . internal and external security. pdfs. Internal security is obtained by defining roles and assigning those to the users. GO-LIVE During this phase the system is subjected for parallel run i.40 (ECC 5. MTP (Mote to Production) and readiness of production system communicating with SAP to conduct GO-Live sessions.361 4. End user training.6C Basis 460 4. 5.Change Request Management System .20 5.actually in RampUp SAP GUI FOR WINDOWS 6. Final Preparation: It is used to prepare the quality and as well as production system. End user acceptance.40 Test Case documents .Select Accelerator Note: Need to focus on these points considering Solution Manager 1. . SAP Early watch report..Goto Project Prep and Db click . Service Market Place..71 Basis 6.. firewalls.00 Basis 6. PowerPoint's. Post Installation Activities 3. External security obtained by deploying routers. word docs.(Solar_testplan) We can maintain the project documentation and the general documentation using the respective tabs.

a change request to change location .Mssg lands in SOLMAN .SOLAR01.Issue/message closed .Management declared that there is no change in location (Issue Closed) .Now it is also be treated as an Issue (Issue Management) .Management approves location change .362 -. Integration test .change request submitted for unit test..Service desk message .Based on the Priority approval for changing the location .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful